1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2056 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2057 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2060 \begin_layout Standard
2061 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2062 are completions available.
2067 key to accept a proposed completion.
2068 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2069 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2070 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2079 ing options for text.
2080 The special math option
2084 enables characters to be composed.
2085 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2086 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2089 , you can then input the characters
2090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2101 to a formula to get it.
2102 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2103 of the math toolbar.
2104 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2108 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2109 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2118 \begin_layout Section
2120 \begin_inset Index idx
2123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2130 \begin_inset Index idx
2133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2162 \begin_inset Index idx
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2196 \begin_layout Standard
2197 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2210 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2212 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2216 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2223 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2230 \begin_layout Standard
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2263 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2267 \begin_layout Labeling
2268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2272 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2273 LatexCommand nomenclature
2275 description "Tabulator key"
2281 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2282 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2283 \begin_inset space ~
2287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2289 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2296 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2300 , especially section
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2307 reference "sub:Lists"
2313 If you are still confused, look in the
2318 \begin_inset Newline newline
2325 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2326 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2330 \begin_layout Labeling
2331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2335 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2336 LatexCommand nomenclature
2338 description "Escape key"
2345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2352 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2353 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2356 \begin_layout Labeling
2357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2363 \begin_inset space ~
2367 \begin_inset space ~
2374 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2375 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2379 \begin_layout Standard
2380 There are three modifier keys:
2383 \begin_layout Labeling
2384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2403 LatexCommand nomenclature
2405 description "Control key"
2409 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2410 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2414 \begin_layout Itemize
2423 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2426 \begin_layout Itemize
2435 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2438 \begin_layout Itemize
2447 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2471 LatexCommand nomenclature
2473 description "Shift key"
2477 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2478 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2481 \begin_layout Labeling
2482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Alt or Meta key"
2507 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2508 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2509 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2515 \begin_inset Newline newline
2518 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2520 menu accelerator keys
2523 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2524 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2528 \begin_layout Standard
2529 For example, the sequence
2530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset space ~
2540 \begin_inset space ~
2546 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset space ~
2579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_layout Standard
2594 manual lists all other things bound to the
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2603 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2604 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2605 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2606 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2607 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2608 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2609 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2611 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2627 followed by a capital
2634 \begin_layout Chapter
2636 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2648 \begin_layout Section
2650 \begin_inset Index idx
2653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2662 \begin_layout Subsection
2666 \begin_layout Standard
2667 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2668 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2669 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2670 numbering schemes, and so on.
2671 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2672 and format the title of your document differently.
2675 \begin_layout Standard
2680 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2681 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2682 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2683 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2684 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2687 \begin_layout Subsection
2689 \begin_inset Index idx
2692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2701 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2709 You can select a class using the
2711 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2712 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2716 \begin_inset Index idx
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2726 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2735 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2739 \begin_layout Description
2740 Article for basic articles
2743 \begin_layout Description
2744 Report for basic reports
2747 \begin_layout Description
2748 Book for writing a book
2751 \begin_layout Description
2752 Letter for US-style letters
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2756 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2757 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2758 will include many of these.
2759 Here are some of the classes.
2760 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2762 Special Document Classes
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2775 \begin_layout Description
2776 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2780 \begin_layout Description
2781 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2787 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2788 There are three article layouts available.
2789 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2790 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2791 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2792 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2797 sequential numbering
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2801 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2802 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2803 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2804 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 Beamer Layout for presentations
2811 \begin_layout Description
2812 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2813 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2817 \begin_layout Description
2818 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2821 \begin_layout Description
2823 \begin_inset space ~
2826 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Foils Used to make transparencies
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2839 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2843 \begin_layout Description
2844 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2845 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2852 \begin_layout Description
2853 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2856 \begin_layout Description
2857 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2858 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2859 (Is used by this document.)
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2866 \begin_layout Description
2867 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2870 \begin_layout Description
2875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2882 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2883 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2885 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 Slides Used to make transparencies
2892 \begin_layout Description
2894 \begin_inset space ~
2897 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2898 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2901 \begin_layout Description
2902 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2908 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2914 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2915 of the document classes.
2918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2923 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2925 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2928 \begin_inset Index idx
2931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2948 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2949 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2951 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2954 \begin_layout Standard
2956 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2957 and some of them, like
2961 , are highly specialized.
2962 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2963 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2965 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2966 by some document class.
2967 There are just too many of them.
2968 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2971 \begin_layout Standard
2972 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2980 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2981 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2982 document class for a new file.
2983 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2988 Installing new LaTeX files
2989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2996 manual for information on how to install them.
2997 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3003 \begin_layout Standard
3004 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3005 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3007 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3008 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3009 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3011 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3015 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3021 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3033 \begin_inset Index idx
3036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3045 \begin_layout Standard
3046 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3047 chosen document class.
3048 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3049 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3070 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3074 \begin_layout Standard
3075 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3076 always installed by default.
3077 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3078 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3079 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3080 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3081 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3082 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3083 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3086 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3090 \begin_inset Index idx
3093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 Reconfiguration of LyX
3100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 Installing new LaTeX files
3104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3111 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3114 \begin_layout Standard
3115 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3123 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3124 LyX will advise you about these things.
3132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3136 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3141 \begin_inset Index idx
3144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3145 Document ! Local Layout
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3154 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3155 used in a variety of different documents.
3156 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3157 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3158 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3159 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3160 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3161 What you want is LyX's
3162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3178 manual for information on how to use it.
3181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3185 \begin_layout Standard
3186 Each class has a default set of options.
3187 Here's a quick table describing them:
3190 \begin_layout Standard
3191 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3197 \begin_layout Standard
3199 \begin_inset Tabular
3200 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3201 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 \begin_layout Standard
3661 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3667 \begin_layout Standard
3668 You're probably also wondering what
3669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3673 \begin_inset space ~
3677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3681 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3682 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3687 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3692 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3702 headings, there are also
3710 headings, and so on.
3711 We will describe these headings fully in section
3712 \begin_inset space ~
3716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3718 reference "sub:Headings"
3725 \begin_layout Subsection
3727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3729 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3734 \begin_inset Index idx
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3744 \begin_inset Index idx
3747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 \begin_layout Standard
3757 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3759 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3766 \begin_inset space ~
3774 \begin_inset space ~
3779 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3781 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3782 to use for your document.
3783 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3787 \begin_layout Standard
3791 \begin_inset space ~
3798 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3809 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3810 You can choose between the following five options:
3813 \begin_layout Labeling
3814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3819 Use default page style of current class.
3822 \begin_layout Labeling
3823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3828 No page numbers or headings.
3831 \begin_layout Labeling
3832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3840 \begin_layout Labeling
3841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3846 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3847 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3848 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3851 \begin_layout Labeling
3852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3858 have the LaTeX-package
3863 \begin_inset Index idx
3866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3873 How they are defined is explained in section
3874 \begin_inset space ~
3878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3880 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3887 \begin_layout Standard
3888 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3889 \begin_inset space ~
3893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3895 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3902 \begin_layout Subsection
3903 Paper Size and Orientation
3904 \begin_inset Index idx
3907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3908 Document ! Paper size
3914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3916 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3923 \begin_layout Standard
3924 You can find the following options in the menu
3927 \begin_inset space ~
3934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3938 \begin_inset Index idx
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_layout Labeling
3951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 What size paper to print on.
3965 \begin_layout Itemize
3971 \begin_layout Itemize
3977 \begin_layout Itemize
3983 \begin_layout Itemize
3989 \begin_layout Itemize
3992 US letter, US legal, US executive
3995 \begin_layout Itemize
4001 \begin_layout Itemize
4008 \begin_layout Labeling
4009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4014 To choose whether to output as
4025 \begin_layout Labeling
4026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4030 \begin_inset space ~
4035 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4036 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4039 \begin_layout Subsection
4041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 \begin_layout Standard
4071 Paper margins are set in the menu
4073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4077 \begin_inset Index idx
4080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4089 \begin_layout Standard
4090 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4091 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4092 the paper format and the font size into account.
4095 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4105 That includes the paragraph environments.
4106 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4107 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4108 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4109 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4118 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4120 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4121 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4122 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4125 \begin_layout Section
4126 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4131 Paragraph ! Indentation
4139 \begin_layout Subsection
4141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4143 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4150 \begin_layout Standard
4151 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4152 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4155 \begin_layout Standard
4156 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4157 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4158 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4159 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4163 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4169 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4170 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4171 language than English.
4172 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4176 \begin_layout Standard
4177 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4178 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4180 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4181 LyX takes care of that.
4182 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4184 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4185 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4186 of a page, and so on.
4190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4191 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4196 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4197 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4201 these pre-coded spacings.
4202 We will explain more later.
4205 \begin_layout Subsection
4206 Paragraph Separation
4207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4209 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4214 \begin_inset Index idx
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4218 Paragraph ! Separation
4226 \begin_layout Standard
4234 \begin_inset space ~
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4249 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4253 \begin_inset Index idx
4256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4262 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4265 \begin_layout Subsection
4269 \begin_layout Standard
4270 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4273 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4275 \begin_inset space ~
4280 dialog and toggle the
4283 \begin_inset space ~
4288 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4291 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4295 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4296 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4302 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4307 \begin_inset Index idx
4310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4311 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4319 \begin_layout Standard
4322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset Index idx
4329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4338 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4342 \begin_inset space ~
4351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4352 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4357 \begin_inset Index idx
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4366 installed to use this feature.
4371 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4373 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4375 \begin_inset space ~
4380 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4381 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4384 \begin_layout Section
4385 Paragraph Environments
4386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4388 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4393 \begin_inset Index idx
4396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4397 Paragraph ! Environments
4403 \begin_inset Index idx
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 Paragraph environments|(
4415 \begin_layout Subsection
4419 \begin_layout Standard
4420 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4423 \begin_layout Standard
4442 \begin_inset Newline newline
4445 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4446 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4447 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4456 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4459 \begin_layout Standard
4460 A paragraph environment is simply a
4461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4468 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4469 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4470 scheme, labels, and so on.
4471 Additionally, you can
4472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4479 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4480 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4481 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4482 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4484 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4486 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4491 \begin_inset Graphics
4492 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4498 at the left end of the toolbar.
4499 LyX will change the environment of the
4503 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4504 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4505 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4509 \begin_layout Standard
4518 create a new paragraph using the
4522 paragraph environment.
4524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4531 because if you are in one of these environments:
4534 \begin_layout Itemize
4540 \begin_layout Itemize
4546 \begin_layout Itemize
4552 \begin_layout Itemize
4558 \begin_layout Itemize
4564 \begin_layout Itemize
4570 \begin_layout Itemize
4576 \begin_layout Standard
4577 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4581 , rather than resetting it to
4586 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4587 \begin_inset space ~
4591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4593 reference "sec:Nesting"
4600 \begin_layout Subsection
4604 \begin_layout Standard
4605 The default paragraph environment is
4610 It creates a plain paragraph.
4611 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4612 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4613 this manual) are in the
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4621 You can nest a paragraph using the
4625 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4633 \begin_layout Subsection
4635 \begin_inset Index idx
4638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4647 \begin_layout Standard
4648 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4657 for thanks or contact information.
4658 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4659 page along with today's date.
4660 For other types of documents, the title
4661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4668 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4672 \begin_layout Standard
4673 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4687 Here's how you use them:
4690 \begin_layout Itemize
4691 Put the title of your document in the
4698 \begin_layout Itemize
4699 Put the author name in the
4706 \begin_layout Itemize
4707 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4708 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4714 Note that using this environment is optional.
4715 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4716 If you don't want a date, use the option
4718 Suppress default date on front page
4722 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4725 \begin_inset space ~
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4734 You can use footnotes to insert
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4742 or contact information.
4745 \begin_layout Subsection
4747 \begin_inset Index idx
4750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4768 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4773 \begin_inset Index idx
4776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4777 Section headings ! Numbered
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4786 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4790 \begin_layout Enumerate
4796 \begin_layout Enumerate
4802 \begin_layout Enumerate
4808 \begin_layout Enumerate
4814 \begin_layout Enumerate
4820 \begin_layout Enumerate
4826 \begin_layout Enumerate
4832 \begin_layout Standard
4833 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4834 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4835 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4838 \begin_layout Standard
4839 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4840 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4841 You group the book into chapters.
4842 LyX does a similar grouping:
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4850 is divided into either
4861 \begin_layout Itemize
4873 \begin_layout Itemize
4885 \begin_layout Itemize
4897 \begin_layout Itemize
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 \begin_layout Standard
4922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4930 Not all document types use the
4934 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4939 is the top-level heading.
4947 \begin_layout Standard
4952 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4953 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4955 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4969 \begin_inset Index idx
4972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4973 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 The unnumbered section headings have a
4983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4990 at the end of their name.
4991 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4992 the table of contents, see section
4993 \begin_inset space ~
4997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5007 Changing the Numbering
5008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5010 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5019 in the Table of Contents.
5020 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5022 Just as certain classes start with
5036 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5046 This is something you can change.
5049 \begin_layout Standard
5052 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5056 \begin_inset Index idx
5059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5068 \begin_inset space ~
5072 \begin_inset space ~
5077 you will see two counters.
5082 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5084 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5089 Short Titles of Headings
5090 \begin_inset Index idx
5093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5094 Section headings ! Short titles
5100 \begin_inset Argument 1
5103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5112 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5119 \begin_layout Standard
5120 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5121 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5122 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5123 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5126 \begin_layout Standard
5127 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5128 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5129 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5130 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5133 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5135 \begin_inset space ~
5141 This will insert a box labeled
5142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5146 \begin_inset space ~
5150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5153 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5154 This also works for captions inside floats.
5155 There can only be one short title per title.
5158 \begin_layout Standard
5159 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5166 \begin_layout Standard
5167 The following information applies to all section headings:
5170 \begin_layout Itemize
5171 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5174 \begin_layout Itemize
5175 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5179 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5182 \begin_layout Itemize
5183 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5186 \begin_layout Subsection
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5205 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5206 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5207 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5208 the text they contain.
5209 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5217 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5221 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5230 when you start a new paragraph.
5231 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5235 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5236 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5237 have to change back to the
5241 environment yourself.
5244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5253 \begin_inset Index idx
5256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5265 \begin_layout Standard
5266 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5267 time for the differences.
5276 are identical except for one difference:
5280 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5289 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5292 \begin_layout Standard
5293 Here's an example of the
5306 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5308 See – no indentation!
5312 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5313 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5314 the other paragraph.
5317 \begin_layout Standard
5318 Here's another example, this time in the
5325 \begin_layout Quotation
5331 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5332 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5333 the first line, then
5337 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5341 you were quoting other text.
5344 \begin_layout Quotation
5345 Here's a new paragraph.
5346 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5347 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5350 \begin_layout Standard
5351 As the examples show,
5355 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5356 They should put quotes in the
5361 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5365 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5370 \begin_inset Index idx
5373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5380 \begin_inset Index idx
5383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5404 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5410 \begin_inset Newline newline
5413 Which I did not rehearse!
5417 It could be much worse.
5418 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5420 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5421 indented a bit more than the first.
5422 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5428 \begin_inset Newline newline
5431 And make things look fine
5432 \begin_inset Newline newline
5438 arg "newline-insert newline"
5444 \begin_layout Standard
5449 does not indent both margins.
5450 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5451 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5454 arg "newline-insert newline"
5460 \begin_layout Subsection
5462 \begin_inset Index idx
5465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5481 \begin_layout Standard
5482 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5492 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5501 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5502 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5503 describing some general features of all four of them.
5506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5510 \begin_layout Standard
5511 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5513 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5522 reset the environment to
5526 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5527 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5528 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5536 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5543 \begin_layout Standard
5544 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5545 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5547 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5548 you read all of section
5549 \begin_inset space ~
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5555 reference "sec:Nesting"
5562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5564 \begin_inset Index idx
5567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5583 \begin_layout Standard
5584 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5588 paragraph environment.
5589 It has the following properties:
5592 \begin_layout Itemize
5593 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5597 \begin_layout Itemize
5598 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5601 \begin_layout Itemize
5602 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5606 \begin_layout Itemize
5607 The items can have any length.
5608 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5609 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5616 \begin_layout Itemize
5621 environment inside another
5625 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5629 \begin_layout Itemize
5630 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5634 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5637 \begin_layout Itemize
5639 \begin_inset space ~
5643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5645 reference "sec:Nesting"
5649 for a full explanation of nesting.
5653 \begin_layout Standard
5654 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5663 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5666 \begin_layout Standard
5667 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5668 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5671 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 The label for the first level
5676 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The label for the second level is a dash.
5685 \begin_layout Itemize
5686 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5695 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 Back out to the third level.
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 Back to the second level.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5706 Back to the outermost level.
5709 \begin_layout Standard
5710 These are the default labels for an
5715 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5717 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5720 dialog in the submenu
5725 \begin_inset Index idx
5728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5734 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5737 \begin_layout Standard
5738 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5739 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5741 \begin_inset space ~
5745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5747 reference "sec:Nesting"
5754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_inset Index idx
5759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5768 name "sec:Enumerate"
5775 \begin_layout Standard
5780 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5781 It has these properties:
5784 \begin_layout Enumerate
5785 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5789 \begin_layout Enumerate
5790 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5794 \begin_layout Enumerate
5795 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5798 \begin_layout Enumerate
5803 environment resets the counter to one.
5806 \begin_layout Enumerate
5819 \begin_layout Enumerate
5820 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5821 Items can have any length.
5824 \begin_layout Enumerate
5825 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5828 \begin_layout Enumerate
5829 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5832 \begin_layout Enumerate
5833 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5837 \begin_layout Standard
5846 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5847 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5854 \begin_layout Enumerate
5855 The first level of an
5859 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5863 \begin_layout Enumerate
5864 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5877 \begin_layout Enumerate
5878 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5884 Back to the third level
5888 \begin_layout Enumerate
5889 Back to the second level.
5893 \begin_layout Enumerate
5894 Back to the outermost level.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5902 environment, see section
5903 \begin_inset space ~
5907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5909 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5914 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5917 \begin_layout Standard
5918 There is more to nesting
5922 environments than we've stated here.
5923 You should read section
5924 \begin_inset space ~
5928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5930 reference "sec:Nesting"
5934 to learn more about nesting.
5937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5939 \begin_inset Index idx
5942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 \begin_layout Standard
5952 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5956 list has no fixed label.
5957 Instead, LyX uses the first
5958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5965 of the first line as the label.
5969 \begin_layout Description
5970 Example: This is an example of the
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5991 it is meant that the first usage of the
5995 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5997 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6005 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6010 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6013 \begin_inset space ~
6019 \begin_inset space ~
6023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6025 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6029 for more information.) Here is an example:
6032 \begin_layout Description
6034 \begin_inset space ~
6037 Example: This one shows how to use a
6040 \begin_inset space ~
6052 \begin_layout Description
6053 Usage: You should use the
6057 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6058 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6060 It's not a good idea to use a
6064 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6065 You're better off using
6077 paragraphs into them.
6080 \begin_layout Description
6081 Nesting: You can nest
6085 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6090 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6091 them from the first line.
6094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6096 \begin_inset Index idx
6099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6108 \begin_layout Standard
6113 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6116 \begin_layout Standard
6125 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6127 Here are its properties:
6130 \begin_layout Labeling
6131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6133 \begin_inset space ~
6136 labels LyX uses the first
6137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6144 of each line as the item label.
6149 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6150 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6151 space as described above.
6154 \begin_layout Labeling
6155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6156 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6157 the body of the item text.
6158 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6159 label width plus a little extra space.
6163 \begin_layout Labeling
6164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6166 \begin_inset space ~
6169 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6171 If the label width is larger, the label
6172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6179 into the first line.
6180 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6181 margin of the rest of the item text.
6184 \begin_layout Labeling
6185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6187 \begin_inset space ~
6190 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6195 environment has the same left margin.
6196 \begin_inset Newline newline
6199 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6202 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6204 \begin_inset space ~
6209 dialog (toolbar button
6212 arg "layout-paragraph"
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6224 determines the default label width.
6225 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6234 multiple times instead.
6235 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6244 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6247 \begin_inset space ~
6252 every time you alter a label in a
6257 \begin_inset Newline newline
6260 The predefined default width is the length of
6261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6275 \begin_layout Standard
6280 list the same way as the
6284 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6290 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6294 \begin_layout Standard
6299 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6300 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6302 \begin_inset space ~
6306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6308 reference "sec:Nesting"
6312 to learn about nesting.
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 There is yet another feature of the
6320 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6322 You can use additional
6326 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6331 are documented in section
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6338 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6343 Here are some examples:
6346 \begin_layout Labeling
6347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6348 Left The default for
6355 \begin_layout Labeling
6356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6357 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6364 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6367 \begin_layout Labeling
6368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6369 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6380 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6383 \begin_layout Subsection
6385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6387 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6392 \begin_inset Index idx
6395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 The features described in this section require that the module
6407 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6409 is loaded in the document settings.
6410 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6415 \begin_inset Index idx
6418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6419 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6428 Custom Enumerate Lists
6429 \begin_inset Index idx
6432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6433 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6441 \begin_layout Standard
6443 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6449 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6450 There you add the command
6453 \begin_layout Standard
6461 \begin_layout Standard
6462 in TeX Code (shortcut
6472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6473 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6480 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6493 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6500 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6501 For capital Roman numerals replace
6513 in the command above.
6514 For Arabic numerals use
6522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6529 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6544 \begin_layout Standard
6546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6554 You can only number 26
6555 \begin_inset space ~
6558 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6566 \begin_layout Standard
6567 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6568 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6575 \begin_layout Enumerate
6576 \begin_inset Argument 1
6579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6605 \begin_layout Enumerate
6606 \begin_inset Argument 1
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 \begin_layout Enumerate
6637 \begin_layout Enumerate
6638 \begin_inset Argument 1
6641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6666 \begin_inset Argument 1
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 \begin_layout Standard
6696 For this list these commands were used:
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6710 \begin_inset Newline newline
6718 \begin_inset Newline newline
6726 \begin_inset Newline newline
6736 \begin_layout Standard
6743 makes the label emphasized and
6752 \begin_layout Standard
6753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6761 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6762 lists until you change the definition.
6770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6772 \begin_inset Index idx
6775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6776 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6785 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6788 \begin_layout Enumerate
6789 \begin_inset Argument 1
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6811 \begin_inset Note Note
6814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 goes back to default numbering
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6831 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6841 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6842 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6845 \begin_layout Standard
6846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6865 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6866 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6867 of a normal enumeration.
6868 There, insert the command
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6882 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6886 \begin_layout Enumerate
6890 \begin_layout Enumerate
6894 \begin_layout Standard
6895 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6898 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_inset Argument 1
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 This enumeration starts at 4
6921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6923 \begin_inset Index idx
6926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6936 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6938 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6941 \begin_layout Itemize
6945 \begin_layout Itemize
6946 with standard spacing
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6950 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6952 Add there the command
6956 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6959 \begin_layout Itemize
6960 \begin_inset Argument 1
6963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6982 \begin_layout Itemize
6986 \begin_layout Itemize
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6997 \begin_inset Index idx
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7001 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7007 For more information see its documentation,
7008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7020 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7021 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7025 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7028 \begin_layout Enumerate
7029 \begin_inset Argument 1
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7053 \begin_layout Enumerate
7054 with negative indentation
7057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7058 Further Customization
7059 \begin_inset Index idx
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 Lists ! Customization
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 You can also change the style of description lists.
7076 \begin_layout Standard
7082 \begin_layout Standard
7083 changes the description label font, the command
7086 \begin_layout Standard
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7093 sets the list style.
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 An example where the command
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7105 itshape, style=nextline
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_layout Description
7114 \begin_inset space ~
7118 \begin_inset Argument 1
7121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7127 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7129 itshape, style=nextline
7139 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7140 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7144 \begin_layout Description
7146 \begin_inset space ~
7149 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7150 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7151 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7154 \begin_layout Standard
7155 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7161 \begin_inset Index idx
7164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7171 For more information see its documentation
7172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7181 \begin_layout Subsection
7183 \begin_inset Index idx
7186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7197 \begin_inset space ~
7200 Address: An Overview
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7212 \begin_inset space ~
7218 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7219 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7220 In contrast, you can use the
7227 \begin_inset space ~
7232 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7233 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7238 Of course, you're not limited to using
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7254 \begin_inset space ~
7259 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7260 some European academic papers.
7263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7267 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7274 \begin_layout Standard
7279 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7280 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7284 \begin_inset space ~
7289 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7290 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7291 Here's an example of each:
7294 \begin_layout Right Address
7296 \begin_inset Newline newline
7300 \begin_inset Newline newline
7304 \begin_inset Newline newline
7307 When is it? What is today?
7310 \begin_layout Standard
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7321 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7322 Here's an example of the
7329 \begin_layout Address
7331 \begin_inset Newline newline
7334 Where do I send this
7335 \begin_inset Newline newline
7338 Your post office and country
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 As you can see, both
7349 \begin_inset space ~
7354 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7359 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7365 This makes sense, since
7373 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7374 Thus, you have to use
7381 arg "newline-insert newline"
7386 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7393 \begin_inset space ~
7398 ) to start a new line in an
7405 \begin_inset space ~
7413 \begin_layout Subsection
7417 \begin_layout Standard
7418 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7419 or list of references.
7420 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7425 \begin_inset Index idx
7428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7437 \begin_layout Standard
7442 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7443 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7444 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7445 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7459 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7460 The book document classes ignores the
7464 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7468 in a letter document class.
7471 \begin_layout Standard
7476 environment does several things for you.
7477 First, it puts the centered label
7478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7486 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7488 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7489 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7490 the subsequent text.
7491 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7492 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7497 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7501 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7502 The new paragraph will still be in the
7507 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7508 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 \begin_inset Float figure
7517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7519 \begin_inset Graphics
7520 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7528 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7533 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7555 We would love to demonstrate the
7559 environment, but since this document is in the
7560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7567 class, we can't do this.
7568 We inserted it therefore as figure
7569 \begin_inset space ~
7573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7575 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7580 If you have never heard of an
7581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7588 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7593 \begin_inset Index idx
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7605 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7612 \begin_layout Standard
7617 environment is used to list references.
7618 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7619 only use it at the end of the document.
7631 \begin_layout Standard
7632 When you first open a
7636 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7652 depending on the document class.
7653 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7654 Each paragraph of the
7658 environment is a bibliography entry.
7663 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7664 Each new paragraph is still in the
7671 \begin_layout Standard
7672 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7673 by using a BibTeX database.
7674 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7675 phy handling, have a look at section
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7689 \begin_layout Subsection
7690 Special Environments
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7694 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7695 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7702 \begin_inset Index idx
7705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7726 environment is a LyX extension.
7727 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7732 key as a fixed whitespace.
7736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7748 \begin_inset space ~
7753 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7766 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7768 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7771 arg "newline-insert newline"
7788 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7789 So, when you finish using the
7793 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7794 Also, you can nest the
7798 environment inside of others.
7801 \begin_layout Standard
7802 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7805 \begin_layout Itemize
7809 arg "newline-insert newline"
7812 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7817 \begin_inset space \space{}
7827 arg "newline-insert newline"
7833 \begin_layout Itemize
7837 arg "newline-insert newline"
7847 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7853 \begin_layout Itemize
7854 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7855 You must put at least one
7859 in any line you want blank.
7860 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7863 \begin_layout Itemize
7864 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7868 since that will insert
7873 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7876 arg "self-insert \""
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7886 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7890 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7894 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7898 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7902 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7903 printf("Hello World!
7908 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7912 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7916 \begin_layout Standard
7917 This is just the standard
7918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 \begin_layout Standard
7934 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7936 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7937 as if you used a typewriter.
7938 \begin_inset Index idx
7941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7942 Paragraph environments|)
7947 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7950 Program Code Listings
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7984 environment is similar to the
7988 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7989 computer console text.
7994 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8007 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8008 you can have empty lines.
8020 \begin_layout Itemize
8021 have a certain language and a text style
8024 \begin_layout Itemize
8025 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8026 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8030 \begin_layout Standard
8031 Because of these properties
8035 works like a typewriter.
8039 \begin_layout Verbatim
8044 \begin_layout Verbatim
8048 The following 2 lines are empty:
8051 \begin_layout Verbatim
8055 \begin_layout Verbatim
8059 \begin_layout Verbatim
8061 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8066 \begin_layout Section
8067 Nesting Environments
8068 \begin_inset Index idx
8071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8072 Nesting ! Environments
8078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8087 \begin_layout Subsection
8091 \begin_layout Standard
8092 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8094 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8096 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8098 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8110 \begin_layout Enumerate
8114 \begin_layout Enumerate
8119 \begin_layout Enumerate
8123 \begin_layout Enumerate
8128 \begin_layout Enumerate
8132 \begin_layout Standard
8133 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8134 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8136 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8138 \begin_inset space ~
8142 \begin_inset space ~
8150 \begin_inset space ~
8154 \begin_inset space ~
8159 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8161 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8164 arg "depth-increment"
8170 arg "depth-decrement"
8184 arg "depth-increment"
8190 arg "depth-decrement"
8194 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8195 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8199 \begin_layout Standard
8200 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8201 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8202 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8203 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8206 \begin_layout Standard
8207 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8208 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8210 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8213 \begin_layout Subsection
8214 What You Can and Can't Nest
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8219 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8223 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8224 than a simple yes or no.
8225 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8228 \begin_layout Itemize
8229 Completely unnestable
8232 \begin_layout Itemize
8233 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8237 \begin_layout Itemize
8238 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8242 \begin_layout Standard
8243 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8244 environments have them:
8247 \begin_layout Description
8248 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8249 Can't nest into them.
8253 \begin_layout Itemize
8259 \begin_layout Itemize
8265 \begin_layout Itemize
8271 \begin_layout Itemize
8277 \begin_layout Itemize
8284 \begin_layout Description
8286 \begin_inset space ~
8289 Nestable You can nest them.
8290 You can nest other things into them.
8294 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 \begin_layout Itemize
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8312 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 \begin_layout Itemize
8336 \begin_layout Itemize
8342 \begin_layout Itemize
8349 \begin_layout Description
8350 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8351 You can't nest anything into them.
8355 \begin_layout Itemize
8361 \begin_layout Itemize
8367 \begin_layout Itemize
8373 \begin_layout Itemize
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8385 \begin_layout Itemize
8391 \begin_layout Itemize
8397 \begin_layout Itemize
8403 \begin_layout Itemize
8409 \begin_layout Itemize
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8433 \begin_layout Itemize
8437 \begin_inset space ~
8443 \begin_layout Itemize
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8459 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8469 \begin_inset space ~
8472 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8473 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8474 nested section headings violate this.
8482 \begin_layout Subsection
8483 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8484 \begin_inset Index idx
8487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8488 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8496 \begin_layout Standard
8497 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8498 affected by nesting anyhow.
8502 \begin_layout Itemize
8506 \begin_layout Itemize
8510 \begin_layout Itemize
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8516 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8524 Figures and tables in
8528 are not affected by this.
8533 Have a look at section
8534 \begin_inset space ~
8538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8540 reference "sec:Floats"
8544 for more information about
8551 \begin_layout Standard
8552 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8553 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8557 \begin_layout Standard
8558 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8566 of its own, it behaves just like a
8567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8574 paragraph environment.
8575 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8579 \begin_layout Standard
8580 Here's an example with a table:
8583 \begin_layout Enumerate
8588 \begin_layout Enumerate
8589 This is (a) and it's nested.
8593 \begin_layout Standard
8594 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8600 \begin_layout Standard
8602 \begin_inset Tabular
8603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8604 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8698 \begin_layout Enumerate
8700 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8704 \begin_layout Enumerate
8708 \begin_layout Standard
8709 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8712 \begin_layout Enumerate
8717 \begin_layout Enumerate
8718 This is (a) and it's nested.
8722 \begin_layout Standard
8723 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8729 \begin_layout Standard
8731 \begin_inset Tabular
8732 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8733 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8734 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8735 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8820 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8826 \begin_layout Enumerate
8833 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8836 \begin_layout Enumerate
8840 \begin_layout Standard
8841 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8846 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8848 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8857 This is (a) and it's nested.
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8867 \begin_layout Standard
8869 \begin_inset Tabular
8870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8871 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8872 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8873 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 \begin_layout Standard
8959 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8965 \begin_layout Enumerate
8967 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8974 \begin_layout Enumerate
8978 \begin_layout Standard
8979 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8985 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8986 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8990 \begin_layout Subsection
8991 Usage and General Features
8994 \begin_layout Standard
8995 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9004 is the innermost possible depth.
9005 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9008 \begin_layout Enumerate
9009 level #1 – outermost
9013 \begin_layout Enumerate
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 \begin_layout Itemize
9033 \begin_layout Itemize
9042 \begin_layout Standard
9043 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9044 both of them in the example.
9045 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9055 For example, if we tried to nest another
9060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9067 , we would get errors.
9070 \begin_layout Subsection
9072 \begin_inset Index idx
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 \begin_layout Standard
9085 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9086 We have several examples of nested environments.
9087 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9091 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9092 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9095 \begin_layout Labeling
9096 \labelwidthstring MMM
9097 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9106 \begin_layout Labeling
9107 \labelwidthstring MMM
9108 #2-a This is level #2.
9109 We created it by using
9112 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9118 arg "depth-increment"
9125 \begin_layout Labeling
9126 \labelwidthstring MMM
9127 #3-a This is level #3.
9128 This time, we just enter
9135 arg "depth-increment"
9139 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9143 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9149 arg "depth-increment"
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9161 environment, nested inside of
9162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9170 So, it's at level #4.
9171 We did this by entering
9174 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9180 arg "depth-increment"
9183 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9188 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9204 \begin_layout Standard
9209 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9212 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9218 \begin_layout Labeling
9219 \labelwidthstring MMM
9220 #4-a This is level #4.
9224 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9227 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9232 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9236 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9241 keep nesting things inside
9242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9253 \begin_layout Labeling
9254 \labelwidthstring MMM
9255 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9260 \begin_layout Labeling
9261 \labelwidthstring MMM
9262 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9263 and this is level #6.
9264 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9268 \begin_layout Labeling
9269 \labelwidthstring MMM
9270 #5-b Back to level #5.
9274 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9280 arg "depth-decrement"
9287 \begin_layout Labeling
9288 \labelwidthstring MMM
9292 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9298 arg "depth-decrement"
9301 , we're back at level #4.
9305 \begin_layout Labeling
9306 \labelwidthstring MMM
9307 #3-b Back to level #3.
9308 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9312 \begin_layout Labeling
9313 \labelwidthstring MMM
9314 #2-b Back to level #2.
9319 \begin_layout Labeling
9320 \labelwidthstring MMM
9321 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9322 After this sentence, we will enter
9326 and change the paragraph environment back to
9333 \begin_layout Standard
9334 We could have also used the
9350 environment in place of the
9355 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9359 Example 2: Inheritance
9362 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9363 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9366 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9375 arg "depth-increment"
9379 \begin_inset Newline newline
9382 which, we will change to the
9390 \begin_layout Enumerate
9395 environment, at level #2.
9398 \begin_layout Enumerate
9399 Notice how the nested
9403 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9407 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9411 \begin_layout Standard
9412 We ended this example by entering
9417 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9421 and reset the nesting depth by using
9424 arg "depth-decrement"
9430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9431 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9440 \begin_inset Argument 1
9443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9444 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9452 \begin_layout Enumerate
9453 This is level #1, in an
9457 paragraph environment.
9458 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9462 \begin_layout Enumerate
9467 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9473 arg "depth-increment"
9477 Now, what happens if we nest an
9481 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9482 label be? An asterisk?
9486 \begin_layout Itemize
9496 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9497 So, its label is a bullet.
9498 (We got here by using
9501 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9507 arg "depth-increment"
9510 , then changing the environment to
9518 \begin_layout Itemize
9519 Here's level #4, produced using
9522 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9528 arg "depth-increment"
9532 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9537 \begin_layout Enumerate
9538 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9540 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9545 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9549 , because we are in the
9557 environment (that is, it is an
9572 \begin_layout Enumerate
9577 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9578 type of numbering does LyX use?
9581 \begin_layout Enumerate
9582 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9585 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9591 \begin_layout Enumerate
9595 arg "depth-decrement"
9598 to decrease the depth after the next
9601 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9608 \begin_layout Enumerate
9610 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9614 \begin_layout Enumerate
9616 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9617 numeral as the label.Why?
9620 \begin_layout Enumerate
9621 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9630 Notice, however, that LyX
9634 reset the counter for the label.
9638 \begin_layout Enumerate
9642 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9648 arg "depth-decrement"
9651 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9652 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9653 into the twofold-nested
9661 \begin_layout Enumerate
9662 The same thing happens if we do another
9665 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9671 arg "depth-decrement"
9674 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9677 \begin_layout Standard
9678 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9683 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9697 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9703 The same rule applies for the
9707 environment, as well.
9710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9711 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9714 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9716 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9717 the same detail with how we did it.
9726 \begin_layout Standard
9734 arg "depth-increment"
9741 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9742 the example in parentheses someplace.
9743 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9744 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9745 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9759 Now we will add verse.
9760 \begin_inset Newline newline
9763 It will get much worse.
9764 \begin_inset Newline newline
9774 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9786 \begin_inset Newline newline
9789 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9790 \begin_inset Newline newline
9796 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9809 \begin_layout Standard
9810 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9816 \begin_layout Standard
9818 \begin_inset Tabular
9819 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9820 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9911 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9921 arg "depth-increment"
9927 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9933 \begin_inset Newline newline
9941 arg "depth-decrement"
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 : level #1) This is another item.
9954 Note that selecting a
9958 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9959 3 times to put the table inside the
9967 \begin_layout Quotation
9968 We're now ending the
9972 list and changing to
9977 We're still at level #1.
9978 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9979 The next set of paragraphs is a
9980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9987 We will nest both the
9994 \begin_inset space ~
9999 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10003 for the letter body.
10007 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 to preserve the depth.
10011 Remember that you need to use
10014 arg "newline-insert newline"
10017 to create multiple lines inside the
10024 \begin_inset space ~
10034 \begin_layout Right Address
10036 \begin_inset Newline newline
10039 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10040 \begin_inset Newline newline
10046 \begin_layout Address
10048 \begin_inset space ~
10054 \begin_layout Quotation
10055 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10059 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10060 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10061 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10062 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10063 as soon as possible.
10064 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10067 \begin_layout Quotation
10068 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10069 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10070 with your order, along with payment.
10073 \begin_layout Quotation
10074 We thank you again for your patience.
10077 \begin_layout Address
10079 \begin_inset Newline newline
10086 \begin_layout Quotation
10087 That ends that example!
10090 \begin_layout Standard
10091 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10092 just a few keystrokes.
10093 We could have easily nested an
10114 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10117 \begin_layout Subsection
10119 \begin_inset Index idx
10122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10123 Nesting ! Separation
10129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10131 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10138 \begin_layout Standard
10139 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10141 For example you need two different enumerations:
10144 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 \begin_layout Enumerate
10154 \begin_layout Enumerate
10158 \begin_layout --Separator--
10162 \begin_layout Itemize
10168 \begin_layout --Separator--
10172 \begin_layout Enumerate
10176 \begin_layout Enumerate
10180 \begin_layout Enumerate
10184 \begin_layout Standard
10185 To tell LyX that there are two lists an not one, set the cursor at the end
10186 of the last item and use the menu
10188 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10189 Start New Parent Environment
10192 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10193 If you use instead the menu
10195 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10196 Start New Environment
10198 a new list will also be created, but in the same besting level.
10201 \begin_layout Standard
10202 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10206 arg "paragraph-break"
10213 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10216 \begin_layout Section
10217 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10218 \begin_inset Index idx
10221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10230 \begin_layout Standard
10231 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10232 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10233 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10234 be broken at the end of a line.
10235 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10239 \begin_layout Subsection
10241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10243 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10248 \begin_inset Index idx
10251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10260 \begin_layout Standard
10261 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10262 line at that point.
10263 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10266 \begin_layout Quote
10267 Further documentation is given in section
10268 \begin_inset Newline newline
10272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10274 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10282 \begin_layout Standard
10283 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10298 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10307 A protected space is set with
10309 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10310 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10312 \begin_inset space ~
10320 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10326 \begin_layout Subsection
10328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10330 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10335 \begin_inset Index idx
10338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10339 Spacing ! Horizontal
10347 \begin_layout Standard
10348 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10350 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10351 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10355 The length units are listed in Appendix
10356 \begin_inset space ~
10360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10362 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10373 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10378 \begin_inset Index idx
10381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10382 Spaces ! Inter-word
10390 \begin_layout Standard
10391 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10392 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10393 at the ends of sentences.
10394 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10395 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10396 followed by a period; see section
10397 \begin_inset space ~
10401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10403 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10408 To insert a normal space, select
10410 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10411 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10413 \begin_inset space ~
10421 arg "space-insert normal"
10427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10431 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10436 \begin_inset Index idx
10439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 \begin_layout Standard
10450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10457 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10466 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10467 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10468 inside abbreviations:
10471 \begin_layout Quote
10473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10477 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 or between values and units.
10482 Compare for example this:
10483 \begin_inset Newline newline
10487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10491 \begin_inset Newline newline
10494 10 kg (normal space
10497 \begin_layout Standard
10498 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10500 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10501 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10503 \begin_inset space ~
10511 arg "space-insert thin"
10517 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10521 \begin_layout Standard
10522 You can also insert the following space types:
10525 \begin_layout Description
10527 \begin_inset space ~
10531 \begin_inset space ~
10534 space A line with a
10535 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10539 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10543 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10546 negative thin space between the arrows.
10549 \begin_layout Description
10551 \begin_inset space ~
10555 \begin_inset space ~
10558 space A line with a
10559 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10563 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10567 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10570 negative medium space between the arrows.
10573 \begin_layout Description
10575 \begin_inset space ~
10579 \begin_inset space ~
10582 space A line with a
10583 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10587 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10591 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10594 negative thick space between the arrows.
10597 \begin_layout Description
10599 \begin_inset space ~
10603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10607 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10611 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10615 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10619 \begin_inset space ~
10623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10626 em) space between the arrows.
10629 \begin_layout Description
10631 \begin_inset space ~
10635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10639 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10643 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10647 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10651 \begin_inset space ~
10655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10658 em) space between the arrows.
10661 \begin_layout Description
10663 \begin_inset space ~
10667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10671 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10675 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10679 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10683 \begin_inset space ~
10687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10690 em) space between the arrows.
10693 \begin_layout Description
10695 \begin_inset space ~
10699 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10703 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10708 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10715 cm space between the arrows.
10718 \begin_layout Standard
10720 \begin_inset space ~
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10726 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10730 lists the different space sizes.
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 \begin_inset Float table
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10740 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10745 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10749 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10759 \begin_inset Tabular
10760 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10761 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10762 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10763 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10879 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11038 \begin_inset Index idx
11041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11050 \begin_layout Standard
11051 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11052 in a uniform fashion.
11053 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11054 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11055 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11056 equally between themselves.
11059 \begin_layout Standard
11060 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11063 \begin_layout Quote
11065 This is on the left side
11066 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11069 This is on the right
11072 \begin_layout Quote
11075 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11079 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11085 \begin_layout Quote
11088 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11092 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11096 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11102 \begin_layout Standard
11103 That was an example in the
11109 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11113 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11117 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11120 is one in a standard paragraph.
11121 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11125 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11128 \begin_layout Standard
11129 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11132 \begin_inset space ~
11137 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11140 \begin_layout Standard
11142 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11146 \begin_inset space ~
11152 \begin_layout Standard
11154 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11158 \begin_inset space ~
11164 \begin_layout Standard
11166 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11176 \begin_layout Standard
11178 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11182 \begin_inset space ~
11188 \begin_layout Standard
11190 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11194 \begin_inset space ~
11200 \begin_layout Standard
11202 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11206 \begin_inset space ~
11212 \begin_layout Standard
11213 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11221 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11225 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11226 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11227 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11231 option in the space dialog.
11239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11243 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11248 \begin_inset Index idx
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 \begin_layout Standard
11261 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11262 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11265 \begin_layout Standard
11266 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11269 What is correct English?:
11270 \begin_inset Newline newline
11274 \begin_inset Newline newline
11278 \begin_inset space ~
11281 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11282 \begin_inset Newline newline
11286 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 \begin_inset Newline newline
11301 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11312 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11318 \begin_layout Standard
11320 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11329 \begin_inset space ~
11333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11337 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11339 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11340 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11344 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11354 \begin_inset space ~
11358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11361 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11370 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11371 That is why it is named
11372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11380 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11381 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11385 \begin_layout Subsection
11387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11389 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11409 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11410 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11412 \begin_inset space ~
11418 There you find the following sizes:
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11434 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11439 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11441 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11442 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11444 \begin_inset space ~
11450 \begin_inset Index idx
11453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11454 Document ! Settings
11459 for the paragraph separation.
11460 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset Index idx
11480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11486 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11487 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11492 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11493 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11502 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11511 s are described in section
11512 \begin_inset space ~
11516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11518 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11527 If there are several
11531 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11532 You can therefore use
11536 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11544 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11545 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11551 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11569 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11570 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11582 \begin_layout Subsection
11583 Paragraph Alignment
11584 \begin_inset Index idx
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11588 Paragraph ! Alignment
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11599 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11602 dialog (toolbar button
11605 arg "layout-paragraph"
11609 There are five possibilities:
11612 \begin_layout Itemize
11620 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11626 \begin_layout Itemize
11634 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11640 \begin_layout Itemize
11648 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11654 \begin_layout Itemize
11662 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11668 \begin_layout Itemize
11676 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11682 \begin_layout Standard
11683 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11684 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11685 the left and right margins.
11686 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11689 \begin_layout Standard
11691 This paragraph is right aligned,
11694 \begin_layout Standard
11696 this one is centered,
11699 \begin_layout Standard
11701 this one is left aligned.
11704 \begin_layout Subsection
11706 \begin_inset Index idx
11709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11710 Page breaks ! Forced
11716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11718 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11726 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11727 can force a page break where you want one.
11728 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11729 Only if you use a lot of
11733 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11736 \begin_layout Standard
11737 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11738 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11742 have to change the page breaking.
11745 \begin_layout Standard
11746 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11748 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11750 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11751 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11753 \begin_inset space ~
11759 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11761 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11762 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11764 \begin_inset space ~
11769 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11771 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11772 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11777 at the top of a page.
11778 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11779 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11780 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11781 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11785 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11789 to learn more about
11796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11800 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11805 \begin_inset Index idx
11808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11809 Page breaks ! Clear
11817 \begin_layout Standard
11818 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11819 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11820 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11821 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11822 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11825 \begin_layout Standard
11826 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11828 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11829 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11831 \begin_inset space ~
11837 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11839 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11840 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11842 \begin_inset space ~
11846 \begin_inset space ~
11851 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11852 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11855 \begin_layout Subsection
11857 \begin_inset Index idx
11860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11869 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11877 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11879 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11882 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11884 \begin_inset space ~
11888 \begin_inset space ~
11896 arg "newline-insert newline"
11900 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11905 \begin_inset space ~
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11917 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11920 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11922 This is useful to avoid
11923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11930 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11935 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11936 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11937 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11938 \begin_inset space ~
11942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11944 reference "sec:Quote"
11949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11951 reference "sec:Verse"
11956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11958 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11965 \begin_layout Subsection
11967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11969 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11974 \begin_inset Index idx
11977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11986 \begin_layout Standard
11988 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11999 \begin_layout Standard
12003 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12004 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12006 \begin_inset space ~
12011 you can insert horizontal lines.
12012 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12013 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12014 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12017 \begin_layout Standard
12019 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12030 \begin_layout Section
12031 Characters and Symbols
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12035 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12036 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12037 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12045 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12049 for information on how this is done.
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12053 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12058 dialog via the menu
12060 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12061 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12067 \begin_layout Standard
12068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12076 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12077 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12078 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12086 \begin_layout Section
12087 Fonts and Text Styles
12088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12090 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12097 \begin_layout Subsection
12099 \begin_inset Index idx
12102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of fonts:
12115 \begin_layout Description
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12121 \begin_inset Index idx
12124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12130 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12135 characters) in the font.
12136 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12137 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12138 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12139 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12140 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12141 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12142 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12143 \begin_inset Newline newline
12146 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12147 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12148 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12149 sizes than at small ones.
12150 \begin_inset Newline newline
12164 \begin_inset space ~
12172 \begin_layout Description
12174 \begin_inset space ~
12178 \begin_inset Index idx
12181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12187 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12188 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12189 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12190 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12191 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12192 image manipulation program.
12193 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12194 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12198 pixels high up to 34
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12202 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12203 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12204 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12206 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12207 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12208 \begin_inset Newline newline
12211 Bitmap fonts are named
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12219 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12222 \begin_layout Standard
12223 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12224 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12225 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12226 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12227 use scalable fonts.
12230 \begin_layout Standard
12231 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12234 \begin_layout Standard
12235 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12236 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12237 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12238 font to emphasize text, you use an
12239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12247 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12248 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12252 \begin_layout Subsection
12254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12256 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12263 \begin_layout Standard
12264 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12265 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12266 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12268 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12269 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12270 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12271 to a word processor.
12272 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12273 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12274 across different machines.
12275 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12276 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12278 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12280 \begin_inset space ~
12284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12286 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12291 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12292 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12295 \begin_layout Standard
12296 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12297 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12299 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12300 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12301 that is installed on your system.
12302 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12305 \begin_layout Standard
12306 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12314 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12315 es; so you might have to experiment.
12323 \begin_layout Standard
12324 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12332 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12333 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12341 \begin_layout Subsection
12342 Document Font and Font size
12343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12345 name "sub:Document-Font"
12350 \begin_inset Index idx
12353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12360 \begin_inset Index idx
12363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12372 \begin_layout Standard
12373 You can set the document fonts in the
12375 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12379 \begin_inset Index idx
12382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12383 Document ! Settings
12393 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12394 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12406 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12408 \begin_inset space ~
12411 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12414 \begin_layout Standard
12421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12430 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12431 This requires that you use
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12476 as the output format, i.
12477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12481 \begin_inset space \space{}
12484 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12491 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12496 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12497 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12499 \begin_inset space ~
12502 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12503 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12504 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12506 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12509 \begin_layout Standard
12510 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12515 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12520 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12521 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12547 European Computer Modern
12550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12557 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12560 \begin_layout Standard
12569 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12570 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12575 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12578 \begin_inset space ~
12583 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12589 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12590 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12593 \begin_layout Itemize
12597 \begin_inset space ~
12602 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12615 \begin_inset space ~
12620 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12624 as the default font.
12625 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12626 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12643 One difference is improved kerning.
12651 \begin_layout Itemize
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12664 fonts in (the rare) case that
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12672 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12687 Virtual means that it
12688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12699 -glyphs from other fonts.
12700 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 Loading the LaTeX-package
12727 \begin_inset Index idx
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12731 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12736 with the document preamble line
12737 \begin_inset Newline newline
12744 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12745 \begin_inset Newline newline
12750 will fix the guillemet problem.
12755 and that accented characters are not
12759 glyph, but built of
12763 characters, the accent and the letter.
12764 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12770 If you search for example for the French word
12771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12778 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12787 and not for the glyph
12788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12792 \begin_inset space ~
12796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12802 \begin_layout Itemize
12803 If you do not like the look of
12811 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12816 \begin_inset space ~
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12832 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12836 serif and typewriter fonts,
12840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12841 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12848 \begin_inset space ~
12857 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12862 \begin_inset space \space{}
12870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12874 \begin_inset space \space{}
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12888 \begin_inset space ~
12898 but you can also select your own.
12899 \begin_inset Newline newline
12902 The differences between roman,
12905 \begin_inset space ~
12914 fonts are explained in section
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12921 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12926 \begin_inset Newline newline
12932 \begin_inset space ~
12937 was originally designed for newspapers.
12938 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12939 into the small newspaper columns.
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12948 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12951 \begin_layout Standard
12952 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12965 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12970 depends on the class you are using.
12971 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12974 \begin_layout Standard
12975 Note that the font size is the
12980 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12981 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12982 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12985 \begin_inset space ~
12991 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12998 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13005 \begin_layout Standard
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13014 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13016 \begin_inset space ~
13019 serif or typewriter.
13024 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13034 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13037 \begin_layout Standard
13046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13061 \begin_inset Index idx
13064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13065 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13077 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13082 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13083 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13090 \begin_layout Standard
13091 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13093 Use Old Style Figures
13097 Use True Small Caps
13100 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13103 Use Old Style Figures
13105 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13107 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13115 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13119 Use True Small Caps
13121 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13122 of scaled capitals.
13123 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13124 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13127 \begin_layout Standard
13132 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13133 a font to display the script characters.
13137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13138 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13143 \begin_inset Index idx
13146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13147 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13152 So this has no effect for the document language
13166 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13170 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13178 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13182 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13183 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13184 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13186 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13189 dialog, see section
13190 \begin_inset space ~
13194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13196 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13208 \begin_layout Subsection
13212 \begin_layout Standard
13213 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13215 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13216 choose a math font in the dialog
13218 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13222 \begin_inset Index idx
13225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13226 Document ! Settings
13232 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13233 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13234 default font family
13235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13251 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13252 the document font is available.
13255 \begin_layout Standard
13256 Note that the math font will not be used for
13260 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13266 or by the insertion of the command
13273 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13278 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13279 while the math characters do not.
13281 \begin_inset space ~
13284 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13287 \begin_inset space ~
13295 \begin_inset space ~
13300 in the document font settings.
13303 \begin_layout Standard
13304 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13305 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13312 \begin_inset space ~
13318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13321 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13329 \begin_inset space ~
13335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13341 \begin_layout Subsection
13342 Using Different Character Styles
13343 \begin_inset Index idx
13346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13353 \begin_inset Index idx
13356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 \begin_layout Standard
13366 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13367 certain paragraph environments.
13368 LyX supports two character styles,
13377 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13381 \begin_layout Standard
13386 style, do one of the following:
13389 \begin_layout Itemize
13390 click on the toolbar button
13399 \begin_layout Itemize
13400 use the key binding
13409 \begin_layout Standard
13410 These commands are all toggles.
13415 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13418 \begin_layout Standard
13419 One typically uses the
13423 style for proper names.
13425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13432 is the original author of LyX.
13433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13439 \begin_layout Standard
13440 A more widely used character style is the
13445 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13452 \begin_layout Itemize
13453 clicking on the toolbar button
13462 \begin_layout Itemize
13463 using the keybindings
13472 \begin_layout Standard
13477 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13478 es use a different font.
13481 \begin_layout Standard
13482 We've been using the
13486 style all over the place in this document.
13487 Here's one more example:
13490 \begin_layout Quotation
13493 Do not overuse character styles!
13496 \begin_layout Standard
13497 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13498 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13499 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13500 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13504 \begin_layout Standard
13505 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13513 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13515 \begin_inset space ~
13518 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13524 arg "dialog-show character"
13530 \begin_layout Subsection
13531 Fine-Tuning with the
13536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13538 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13543 \begin_inset Index idx
13546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13555 \begin_layout Standard
13556 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13557 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13558 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13559 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13560 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13561 from ordinary dialog.
13564 \begin_layout Standard
13565 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13566 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13567 \begin_inset Newline newline
13570 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13571 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13575 To use custom character styles, open the
13577 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13579 \begin_inset space ~
13582 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13585 dialog or press the toolbar button
13588 arg "dialog-show character"
13592 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13593 font property that you can choose.
13594 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13602 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13607 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13608 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13609 environments all at once.
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13613 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13628 \begin_layout Labeling
13629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13643 The possible options are:
13647 \begin_layout Labeling
13648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13653 This is the Roman font family.
13654 Normally a serif font.
13655 It's also the default family.
13665 \begin_layout Labeling
13666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13670 \begin_inset space ~
13677 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13689 \begin_layout Labeling
13690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13697 This is the Typewriter font family.
13703 arg "font-typewriter"
13712 \begin_layout Labeling
13713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13718 This corresponds to the print weight.
13723 \begin_layout Labeling
13724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13729 This is the Medium font series.
13730 It's also the default series.
13733 \begin_layout Labeling
13734 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13741 This is the Bold font series.
13754 \begin_layout Labeling
13755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13760 As the name implies.
13765 \begin_layout Labeling
13766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13771 This is the Upright font shape.
13772 It's also the default shape.
13775 \begin_layout Labeling
13776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13790 s the Italic font shape
13796 \begin_layout Labeling
13797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13804 This is the Slanted font shape
13806 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13809 \begin_layout Labeling
13810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13814 \begin_inset space ~
13821 This is the Small caps font shape
13828 \begin_layout Labeling
13829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13834 Alters the text color.
13835 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13839 \begin_inset space ~
13844 , which means that the document default color set in
13846 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13847 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13853 \begin_inset space ~
13858 is used, you can choose between
13891 \begin_inset Index idx
13894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13903 \begin_layout Labeling
13904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13909 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13910 the language of the document.
13911 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13913 \begin_inset Newline newline
13916 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13917 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13918 When using the spell checking (see section
13919 \begin_inset space ~
13923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13925 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13929 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13932 \begin_layout Labeling
13933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13938 Alters the size of the font.
13939 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13940 proportional to the document font size.
13941 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13942 what you want to do.
13947 \begin_layout Labeling
13948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13969 arg "font-size tiny"
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13997 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14003 \begin_layout Labeling
14004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14025 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14031 \begin_layout Labeling
14032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14053 arg "font-size small"
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14074 It's also the default size.
14078 arg "font-size normal"
14084 \begin_layout Labeling
14085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14106 arg "font-size large"
14112 \begin_layout Labeling
14113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14134 arg "font-size larger"
14140 \begin_layout Labeling
14141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14162 arg "font-size largest"
14168 \begin_layout Labeling
14169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14190 arg "font-size huge"
14196 \begin_layout Labeling
14197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14218 arg "font-size giant"
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14230 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14250 arg "font-size increase"
14256 \begin_layout Labeling
14257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14282 arg "font-size decrease"
14289 \begin_layout Standard
14294 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14295 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14296 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14297 — use those instead.
14298 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14301 \begin_layout Labeling
14302 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14307 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14312 \begin_layout Labeling
14313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14320 This is text with emphasize on
14323 This might seem like the same as
14327 , but it is actually a bit different.
14333 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14335 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14338 \begin_layout Labeling
14339 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14346 This is text with Underbar on.
14352 arg "font-underline"
14358 \begin_inset Newline newline
14363 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14364 when you could not change fonts.
14365 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14366 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14370 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14373 \begin_layout Labeling
14374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset space ~
14385 This is text with Double underbar on.
14391 arg "font-underunderline"
14395 \begin_inset Newline newline
14398 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14399 about double underbar.
14402 \begin_layout Labeling
14403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14407 \begin_inset space ~
14414 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14420 arg "font-underwave"
14424 \begin_inset Newline newline
14427 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14428 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14431 \begin_layout Labeling
14432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14439 This is text with Strikeout on.
14445 arg "font-strikeout"
14449 \begin_inset Newline newline
14452 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14453 changed in the meantime.
14456 \begin_layout Labeling
14457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14464 This is text with Noun on.
14471 , this is a logical attribute.
14472 Normally it's equivalent to
14475 \begin_inset space ~
14484 \begin_layout Standard
14485 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14486 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14488 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14490 \begin_inset space ~
14493 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14499 arg "dialog-show character"
14502 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14503 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14506 arg "textstyle-apply"
14510 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14514 \begin_layout Standard
14515 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14522 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14523 (suppose you just set the shape to
14524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14542 \begin_inset space ~
14554 \begin_layout Standard
14555 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14563 \begin_inset space ~
14575 \begin_layout Itemize
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14588 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14606 \begin_inset Newline newline
14610 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14624 \begin_inset Note Note
14627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14628 For more on phantoms see section
14629 \begin_inset space ~
14633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14635 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14645 \begin_inset Newline newline
14651 \begin_layout Itemize
14656 fonts use characters with serifs.
14657 These are the small
14658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14665 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14666 The following example shows the difference:
14667 \begin_inset Newline newline
14671 \begin_inset Newline newline
14676 text without serifs
14679 \begin_inset Newline newline
14682 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14683 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14690 \begin_layout Itemize
14695 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14696 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14697 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14700 \begin_layout Standard
14701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14708 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14709 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14712 \begin_inset space ~
14717 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14718 the property to be removed.
14719 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14720 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14721 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14739 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14740 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14748 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14752 \begin_inset space ~
14757 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14768 If you, for example, set
14769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14787 \begin_inset space ~
14792 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14804 \begin_layout Standard
14805 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14806 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14809 \begin_layout Section
14810 Printing and Previewing
14813 \begin_layout Subsection
14817 \begin_layout Standard
14818 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14819 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14820 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14821 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14822 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14824 Additional Features
14829 \begin_layout Standard
14830 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14831 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14832 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14833 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14834 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14835 This happens in two stages:
14838 \begin_layout Enumerate
14839 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14840 generating a file with the extension,
14841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14855 \begin_layout Enumerate
14856 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14860 file to produce printable output.
14863 \begin_layout Subsection
14864 Output file formats
14865 \begin_inset Index idx
14868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14877 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14885 Simple text (ASCII)
14886 \begin_inset Index idx
14889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14890 File formats ! ASCII
14898 \begin_layout Standard
14899 This file type has the extension
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14912 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14916 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14923 \begin_layout Standard
14924 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14926 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14927 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14929 \begin_inset space ~
14935 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14936 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14937 \begin_inset space ~
14941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14943 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14948 If your document includes such material, use
14950 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14951 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14953 \begin_inset space ~
14957 \begin_inset space ~
14961 \begin_inset space ~
14969 \begin_inset space ~
14973 \begin_inset space ~
14979 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14980 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14985 \begin_inset Index idx
14988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14989 File formats ! LaTeX
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14998 This file type has the extension
14999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15010 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15012 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15013 it manually with console commands.
15014 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15015 you view or export your document.
15018 \begin_layout Standard
15019 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15021 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15022 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15037 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15038 \begin_inset space ~
15042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15044 reference "sub:Export"
15051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15053 \begin_inset Index idx
15056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15065 \begin_layout Standard
15066 This file type has the extension
15067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15087 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15088 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15089 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15093 \begin_layout Standard
15094 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15095 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15096 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15097 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15098 when you view the DVI.
15099 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15102 \begin_layout Standard
15103 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15105 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15106 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15111 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15112 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15114 \begin_inset space ~
15121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15131 The latter option uses the program
15140 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15141 font access (see section
15142 \begin_inset space ~
15146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15148 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15153 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15154 standard TeX processor.
15157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15159 \begin_inset Index idx
15162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15163 File formats ! PostScript
15171 \begin_layout Standard
15172 This file type has the extension
15173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15185 PostScript was developed by the company
15189 as a printer language.
15190 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15192 PostScript can be seen as a
15193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15196 programming language
15197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15200 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15205 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15211 \begin_inset Index idx
15214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15215 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15225 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15228 \begin_layout Standard
15229 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15233 Encapsulated PostScript
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15237 (EPS, file extension
15238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15250 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15251 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15252 If, for example, you have 50
15253 \begin_inset space ~
15256 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15257 \begin_inset space ~
15260 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15261 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15262 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15263 EPS to avoid this problem.
15266 \begin_layout Standard
15267 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15269 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15270 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15278 \begin_inset Index idx
15281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15288 \begin_inset Index idx
15291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15300 \begin_layout Standard
15301 This file type has the extension
15302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15318 Portable Document Format
15319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15326 was derived from PostScript.
15327 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15336 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15337 looks exactly the same.
15340 \begin_layout Standard
15341 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15345 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15349 (JPG, file extension
15350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15377 Portable Network Graphics
15378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15381 (PNG, file extension
15382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15394 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15395 background to one of these formats.
15396 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15397 will slow down your workflow.
15398 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15401 \begin_layout Standard
15402 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15404 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15410 \begin_layout Description
15412 \begin_inset space ~
15415 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15419 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15422 \begin_layout Description
15424 \begin_inset space ~
15431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15438 X) This uses the program
15442 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15447 is a new engine, derived from
15451 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15452 access (see section
15453 \begin_inset space ~
15457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15459 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15464 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15465 standard TeX processor.
15468 \begin_layout Description
15470 \begin_inset space ~
15477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15484 X) This uses the program
15488 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15493 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15494 font access (see section
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15501 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15506 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15507 vertically written Japanese.
15510 \begin_layout Description
15512 \begin_inset space ~
15515 (cropped) This is the same as
15518 \begin_inset space ~
15523 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15524 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15525 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15528 \begin_layout Description
15530 \begin_inset space ~
15533 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15537 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15541 \begin_layout Description
15543 \begin_inset space ~
15546 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15550 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15551 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15555 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15556 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15559 \begin_layout Standard
15563 \begin_inset space ~
15572 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15573 works without problems.
15574 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15575 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15579 \begin_inset space ~
15586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 \begin_inset space ~
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15624 \begin_inset Index idx
15627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15628 FileFormats ! XHTML
15634 \begin_inset Index idx
15637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15646 \begin_layout Standard
15647 This file type has the extension
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15660 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15661 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15662 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15663 suitable for the purpose.
15664 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15666 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15667 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15670 between different formats, which are described in section
15672 Math Output in XHTML
15677 \begin_inset space ~
15685 \begin_layout Standard
15686 XHTML output remains
15687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15694 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15697 LyX and the World Wide Web
15701 Additional Features
15703 manual, for more information.
15706 \begin_layout Standard
15707 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15709 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15710 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15716 \begin_layout Subsection
15718 \begin_inset Index idx
15721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15730 \begin_layout Standard
15731 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15732 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15741 or use the toolbar button
15748 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15749 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15756 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15760 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15768 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15773 Further output formats can be selected via
15775 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15776 View (Other Formats)
15778 or the toolbar button
15779 \begin_inset Graphics
15780 filename ../images/view-others.png
15782 groupId toolbarbuttons
15789 \begin_layout Standard
15790 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15791 viewer window using the menu
15793 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15798 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15799 Update (Other Formats)
15804 \begin_layout Standard
15805 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15807 To have a real output, export your document.
15810 \begin_layout Subsection
15811 Printing the File from within LyX
15812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15814 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15821 \begin_layout Standard
15822 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15823 it directly from within LyX.
15824 To print a file, select the menu
15826 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15832 arg "dialog-show print"
15835 ) or click on the toolbar button
15838 arg "dialog-show print"
15842 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15843 This file is then processed by the program
15847 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15852 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15855 \begin_layout Standard
15856 You can set the following print parameters in the
15859 \begin_inset space ~
15867 \begin_layout Labeling
15868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15873 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15878 Note that this printer name is for the program
15887 has to be configured for this printer name.
15888 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15895 reference "sub:Printer"
15904 The printer should understand PostScript.
15907 \begin_layout Labeling
15908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15913 The name of a file to print to.
15914 The output will be a PostScript file.
15915 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15919 \begin_layout Standard
15920 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15921 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15922 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15923 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15924 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15925 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15926 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15929 \begin_layout Section
15930 A few Words about Typography
15931 \begin_inset Index idx
15934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15943 \begin_layout Subsection
15944 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15945 \begin_inset Index idx
15948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15955 \begin_inset Index idx
15958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15967 \begin_layout Standard
15969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15980 character comes in four lengths: the
15992 , and the minus sign:
15993 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15999 \begin_layout Standard
16000 \begin_inset Tabular
16001 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16002 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16004 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16005 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16006 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16035 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16075 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16100 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16102 \begin_inset space ~
16105 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16112 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16142 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16163 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16197 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16203 \begin_layout Standard
16204 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16216 character multiple times in a row.
16217 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16218 the final output, but not in LyX.
16220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16250 \begin_layout Standard
16251 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16252 math mode and has a length of its own.
16253 Here are some examples:
16256 \begin_layout Enumerate
16257 line- and page-breaks
16258 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16268 \begin_layout Enumerate
16270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16280 \begin_layout Enumerate
16281 Oh — there's a dash.
16282 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16292 \begin_layout Enumerate
16293 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16297 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16307 \begin_layout Subsection
16309 \begin_inset Index idx
16312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16321 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16328 \begin_layout Standard
16329 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16330 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16335 \begin_inset Index idx
16338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16339 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16344 following the rules of the document language.
16347 \begin_layout Standard
16348 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16353 font and with unusual constructs, like
16354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16362 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16364 This is done with the menu
16366 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16367 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16369 \begin_inset space ~
16375 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16376 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16379 \begin_layout Standard
16380 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16381 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16391 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16399 as a hyphenation possibility.
16400 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16401 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16402 as described in section
16403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16406 Prevent Hyphenation
16407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16413 \begin_inset space ~
16421 \begin_layout Subsection
16423 \begin_inset Index idx
16426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16436 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16439 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16446 \begin_layout Standard
16447 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16448 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16449 LaTeX then adds the
16450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16453 appropriate amount of space.
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16459 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16460 gets after another word.
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16464 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16465 not work in all cases.
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16478 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16479 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16482 \begin_layout Standard
16483 Here are some examples of
16487 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16490 \begin_layout Itemize
16495 \begin_layout Itemize
16500 \begin_layout Standard
16501 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16504 \begin_layout Itemize
16506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16510 this is too much space!
16513 \begin_layout Itemize
16518 \begin_layout Standard
16519 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16522 \begin_layout Standard
16523 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16530 \begin_inset space ~
16535 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16536 \begin_inset space ~
16540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16542 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16547 \begin_inset Index idx
16550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16551 Spaces ! inter-word
16559 \begin_layout Enumerate
16563 \begin_inset space ~
16568 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16569 \begin_inset space ~
16573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16575 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16580 \begin_inset Index idx
16583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 \begin_layout Enumerate
16596 \begin_inset space ~
16600 \begin_inset space ~
16604 \begin_inset space ~
16611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16613 \begin_inset space ~
16618 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16619 This function is also bound to
16622 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16628 \begin_layout Standard
16629 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16632 \begin_layout Itemize
16634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16638 \begin_inset space \space{}
16641 this is too much space!
16644 \begin_layout Itemize
16645 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16649 \begin_layout Standard
16650 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16651 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16652 will take care of this.
16655 \begin_layout Standard
16656 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16665 feature described in the section
16671 Additional Features
16676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16678 \begin_inset Index idx
16681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 Typography ! Quotes
16688 \begin_inset Index idx
16691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16722 \begin_layout Standard
16723 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16724 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16725 and use a closing quote at the end.
16727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16735 The keyboard character,
16739 , generates this automatically.
16742 \begin_layout Standard
16743 You can specify what character the
16747 key produces using the submenu
16753 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16757 \begin_inset Index idx
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16761 Document ! Settings
16771 There are six choices:
16774 \begin_layout Labeling
16775 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16798 \begin_layout Labeling
16799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16802 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16806 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16812 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16816 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16822 \begin_layout Labeling
16823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16826 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16830 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16836 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16840 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16846 \begin_layout Labeling
16847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16850 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16860 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16864 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16870 \begin_layout Labeling
16871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16874 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16878 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16884 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16888 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16894 \begin_layout Labeling
16895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16898 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16902 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16908 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16912 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16919 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16922 arg "quote-insert single"
16928 \begin_layout Subsection
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 Typography ! Ligatures
16940 \begin_inset Index idx
16943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16974 name "sub:Ligatures"
16981 \begin_layout Standard
16982 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16983 print them as single characters.
16984 These groups are known as
16989 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16991 Here are the standard ligatures:
16994 \begin_layout Itemize
16998 \begin_layout Itemize
17002 \begin_layout Itemize
17006 \begin_layout Itemize
17010 \begin_layout Itemize
17014 \begin_layout Standard
17015 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17018 \begin_layout Standard
17019 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17020 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17028 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17044 To break a ligature, use
17046 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17047 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17049 \begin_inset space ~
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17067 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17084 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17092 \begin_layout Subsection
17094 \begin_inset Index idx
17097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17106 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17113 \begin_layout Standard
17114 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17115 characters in different sizes and positions.
17116 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17117 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17137 \begin_inset Note Note
17140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17141 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17142 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17147 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17148 following proper names:
17151 \begin_layout Description
17152 LyX The name of the game, write
17153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17174 \begin_layout Description
17175 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17197 \begin_layout Description
17198 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17220 \begin_layout Description
17221 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17243 \begin_layout Standard
17244 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17249 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17257 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17258 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17259 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17262 : The actual version is
17263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17270 , the previous one was
17271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17281 \begin_layout Standard
17282 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17283 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17284 In LyX this will look like
17285 \begin_inset Graphics
17286 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17292 \begin_inset Newline newline
17295 For more about TeX Code, see section
17296 \begin_inset space ~
17300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17302 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17309 \begin_layout Subsection
17311 \begin_inset Index idx
17314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 \begin_layout Standard
17324 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17325 space between two words.
17326 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17336 for units use the menu
17338 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17339 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17341 \begin_inset space ~
17349 arg "space-insert thin"
17355 \begin_layout Standard
17356 Here is an example to show the differences:
17359 \begin_layout Standard
17360 \begin_inset Tabular
17361 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17362 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17363 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17364 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17371 \begin_inset space ~
17375 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17387 space between number and unit
17394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17403 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17415 half space between number and unit
17428 \begin_layout Subsection
17430 \begin_inset Index idx
17433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17434 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17442 \begin_layout Standard
17443 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17445 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17446 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17447 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17448 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17449 These bits of text became known as
17460 \begin_layout Standard
17461 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17462 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17463 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17464 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17465 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17466 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17467 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17468 \begin_inset Newline newline
17476 \begin_inset Newline newline
17484 \begin_inset Newline newline
17487 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17488 Some LaTeX books (such as
17489 \begin_inset space ~
17493 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17495 key "latexcompanion"
17500 \begin_inset space ~
17504 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17510 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17514 \begin_layout Chapter
17515 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17518 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17525 \begin_layout Standard
17526 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17529 \begin_inset space ~
17535 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17538 \begin_layout Section
17540 \begin_inset Index idx
17543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17559 \begin_layout Standard
17560 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17563 \begin_layout Description
17565 \begin_inset space ~
17568 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17569 \begin_inset Newline newline
17573 \begin_inset Note Note
17576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17577 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17585 \begin_layout Description
17586 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17587 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17589 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17590 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17603 \begin_inset space ~
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17613 \begin_inset Note Comment
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17625 \begin_layout Description
17627 \begin_inset space ~
17630 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17631 set in the document settings under
17633 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17641 \begin_inset Newline newline
17645 \begin_inset Newline newline
17649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17658 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17659 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17664 of a comment that appears in the output.
17670 \begin_inset Newline newline
17674 \begin_inset Newline newline
17677 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17680 \begin_layout Standard
17681 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17689 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17693 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17696 \begin_layout Section
17698 \begin_inset Index idx
17701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17710 name "sec:Footnotes"
17717 \begin_layout Standard
17718 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17721 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17724 or the toolbar button
17727 arg "footnote-insert"
17739 \begin_inset Graphics
17740 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17749 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17778 label, the box will
17782 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17783 Clicking on the box label again will close
17796 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17797 and click on the footnote
17812 \begin_layout Standard
17813 Here is an example footnote:
17821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17822 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17830 \begin_layout Standard
17831 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17832 position where the footnote box is placed.
17833 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17834 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17835 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17836 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17841 ey are described in the
17844 \begin_inset space ~
17852 \begin_layout Section
17854 \begin_inset Index idx
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17866 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17873 \begin_layout Standard
17874 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17875 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17877 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17879 \begin_inset space ~
17884 or the toolbar button
17887 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17913 appearing within your text.
17914 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17923 \begin_layout Standard
17924 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17928 \begin_inset Marginal
17931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17933 This is a marginal note.
17941 \begin_layout Standard
17942 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17943 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17944 pages, right on odd pages.
17947 \begin_layout Standard
17948 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17951 \begin_inset space ~
17959 \begin_inset space ~
17967 \begin_layout Section
17968 Graphics and Images
17969 \begin_inset Index idx
17972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17979 \begin_inset Index idx
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17991 name "sec:Graphics"
17998 \begin_layout Standard
17999 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18000 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18003 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18012 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18015 \begin_layout Standard
18016 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18021 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18022 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18024 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18025 \begin_inset space ~
18029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18031 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18038 \begin_layout Standard
18043 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18044 of the image in the output.
18045 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18049 \begin_inset space ~
18053 \begin_inset space ~
18062 \begin_inset space ~
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18070 \begin_inset space ~
18075 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18076 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18084 \begin_layout Standard
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18099 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_inset space ~
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18120 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18124 \begin_inset space ~
18129 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18130 with the image size is printed.
18134 \begin_inset space ~
18138 \begin_inset space ~
18142 \begin_inset space ~
18147 is explained in the
18150 \begin_inset space ~
18162 \begin_layout Standard
18163 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18164 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18166 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18169 \begin_layout Standard
18171 \begin_inset Graphics
18172 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18180 \begin_layout Standard
18181 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18182 the image into a float, see section
18183 \begin_inset space ~
18187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18189 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18196 \begin_layout Subsection
18198 \begin_inset Index idx
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18210 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18217 \begin_layout Standard
18218 You can insert images in any known file format.
18219 But as we explained in section
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18226 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18230 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18231 LyX therefore uses the program
18235 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18236 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18237 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18238 \begin_inset space ~
18242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18244 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18251 \begin_layout Standard
18252 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18255 \begin_layout Description
18257 \begin_inset space ~
18260 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18261 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18262 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18266 Graphics Interchange Format
18267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18270 (GIF, file extension
18271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18283 \begin_inset Index idx
18286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18318 Portable Network Graphics
18319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18322 (PNG, file extension
18323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18335 \begin_inset Index idx
18338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18370 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18374 (JPG, file extension
18375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18399 \begin_inset Index idx
18402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18433 \begin_layout Description
18435 \begin_inset space ~
18438 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18440 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18441 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18442 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18443 \begin_inset Newline newline
18446 Scalable image formats can be
18447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 Scalable Vector Graphics
18451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18454 (SVG, file extension
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18467 \begin_inset Index idx
18470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18502 Encapsulated PostScript
18503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18506 (EPS, file extension
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18519 \begin_inset Index idx
18522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18554 Portable Document Format
18555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18558 (PDF, file extension
18559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18571 \begin_inset Index idx
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18589 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18590 result will not be scalable.
18591 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18597 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18605 \begin_layout Standard
18606 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18613 \begin_layout Subsection
18614 Grouping of Image Settings
18615 \begin_inset Index idx
18618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 Images ! Settings grouping
18627 \begin_layout Standard
18628 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18630 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18631 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18633 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18634 need to manually change each of them.
18638 \begin_layout Standard
18639 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18642 \begin_inset space ~
18646 \begin_inset space ~
18661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18673 \begin_inset space ~
18680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18690 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18691 and checking the name of the desired group.
18694 \begin_layout Section
18696 \begin_inset Index idx
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18719 arg "tabular-insert"
18724 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18728 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18729 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18730 from the rest of the table.
18731 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18732 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18734 Here is an example table:
18737 \begin_layout Standard
18739 \begin_inset Tabular
18740 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18741 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18744 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18745 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 \begin_layout Subsection
18949 \begin_layout Standard
18950 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18953 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18957 This brings up the table dialog.
18958 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18959 cursor is placed currently.
18960 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18961 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18962 done on all of your selection.
18965 \begin_layout Standard
18966 In addition to the table dialog, the
18969 \begin_inset space ~
18974 helps you in setting table properties.
18975 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18978 \begin_layout Standard
18982 \begin_inset space ~
18987 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18988 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18989 current cell respectively.
18990 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18992 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18993 of text, see section
18994 \begin_inset space ~
18998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19000 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
19007 \begin_layout Standard
19008 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19009 using the check box
19018 This will merge the cells to
19022 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19023 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19024 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19025 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19026 in the last row without the upper border:
19029 \begin_layout Standard
19031 \begin_inset Tabular
19032 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19033 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19034 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19035 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19057 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 \begin_layout Standard
19169 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19170 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19171 explained in the chapter
19178 \begin_inset space ~
19184 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19185 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19188 \begin_layout Standard
19189 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 Most DVI-viewers are
19201 able to display rotations.
19209 \begin_layout Standard
19214 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19219 adds lines for all cell borders.
19222 \begin_layout Subsection
19224 \begin_inset Index idx
19227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19228 Tables ! Longtables
19234 \begin_inset Index idx
19237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19246 \begin_layout Standard
19247 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19250 \begin_inset space ~
19254 \begin_inset space ~
19263 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19264 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19267 \begin_layout Description
19272 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19273 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19274 except for the first page, if
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_layout Description
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19294 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19295 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19298 \begin_layout Description
19303 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19304 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19305 except for the last page, if
19308 \begin_inset space ~
19316 \begin_layout Description
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19325 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19326 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19329 \begin_layout Description
19330 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19331 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19333 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19337 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19348 \begin_layout Standard
19349 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19350 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19351 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19357 In this context, first means first in this order:
19360 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19377 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19380 \begin_layout Standard
19382 \begin_inset Tabular
19383 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19384 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19385 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19386 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19387 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19388 <row endfirsthead="true">
19389 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19400 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19419 <row endfirsthead="true">
19420 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19431 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 <row endhead="true">
19453 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19464 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <row endhead="true">
19484 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19495 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <row endfoot="true">
19517 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <row endlastfoot="true">
21499 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 \begin_layout Subsection
21538 \begin_inset Index idx
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21550 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21557 \begin_layout Standard
21558 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21559 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21560 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21561 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21565 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21568 \begin_layout Standard
21569 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21570 for the column in the table dialog.
21571 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21572 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21576 \begin_layout Standard
21578 \begin_inset Tabular
21579 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21580 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21581 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21582 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21583 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21672 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 This is longer now.
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21785 This is longer now.
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 \begin_layout Standard
21817 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21818 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21824 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21830 Selection with the mouse or with
21834 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21835 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21836 the selection from outside the table.
21839 \begin_layout Section
21841 \begin_inset Index idx
21844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21860 \begin_layout Subsection
21864 \begin_layout Standard
21865 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21866 have a fixed location.
21868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21875 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21883 \begin_inset space ~
21888 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21889 too many notes on the current page.
21892 \begin_layout Standard
21893 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21894 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21895 and pages without text.
21896 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21897 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21898 Floats are therefore numbered.
21899 Referencing is described in section
21900 \begin_inset space ~
21904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21906 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21913 \begin_layout Standard
21914 To insert a float, use the menu
21916 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21920 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21921 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21923 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21924 \begin_inset Index idx
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21934 paragraph within the float.
21935 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21936 by left-clicking on the box label.
21937 A closed float box looks like this:
21938 \begin_inset Graphics
21939 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21944 – a gray button with a red label.
21947 \begin_layout Standard
21948 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21949 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21952 \begin_layout Subsection
21954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21956 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21961 \begin_inset Index idx
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 Floats ! Figure floats
21973 \begin_layout Standard
21975 \begin_inset space ~
21979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21981 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21985 was created using the menu
21987 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21988 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21994 arg "float-insert figure"
21998 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22007 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22011 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22012 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22014 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22016 \begin_inset space ~
22024 arg "layout-paragraph"
22030 \begin_layout Standard
22031 \begin_inset Float figure
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 \begin_inset Graphics
22039 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22054 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22058 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22071 \begin_layout Standard
22072 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22073 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22075 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22084 ) and refer to it using the menu
22086 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22092 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22096 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22097 vague references like
22098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22105 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22115 For more about cross-references, see section
22116 \begin_inset space ~
22120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22122 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22129 \begin_layout Standard
22130 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22131 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22132 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22133 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22134 as described in section
22135 \begin_inset space ~
22139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22141 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22147 \begin_inset space ~
22151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22153 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22157 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22158 You can also set the images one below the other.
22160 \begin_inset space ~
22164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22166 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22173 reference "fig:Platypus"
22177 are the subfigures.
22180 \begin_layout Standard
22181 \begin_inset Float figure
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22191 \begin_inset Float figure
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22202 name "fig:Undefinable"
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22215 \begin_inset Graphics
22216 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22227 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22231 \begin_inset Float figure
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22242 name "fig:Platypus"
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 \begin_inset Graphics
22256 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22280 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22284 Two distorted images.
22297 \begin_layout Subsection
22299 \begin_inset Index idx
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 Floats ! Table floats
22311 \begin_layout Standard
22312 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22314 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22315 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22318 or the toolbar button
22321 arg "float-insert table"
22325 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22326 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22327 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22329 \begin_inset space ~
22333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22335 reference "tab:Table-float"
22342 \begin_layout Standard
22343 \begin_inset Float table
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22354 name "tab:Table-float"
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 \begin_inset Tabular
22369 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22370 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22371 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22372 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22524 \end{array}\right]$
22532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22566 \begin_layout Subsection
22568 \begin_inset Index idx
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22580 \begin_layout Standard
22581 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22582 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22583 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22585 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22593 \begin_inset space ~
22601 \begin_layout Section
22603 \begin_inset Index idx
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 \begin_layout Standard
22616 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22618 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22619 \begin_inset space \space{}
22626 \begin_layout Standard
22627 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22629 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22633 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22634 and its alignment within the page.
22637 \begin_layout Standard
22639 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22649 height_special "totalheight"
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 This is a minipage.
22656 The text is set in an italic style.
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22663 another formatting.
22671 \begin_layout Standard
22672 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22675 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22679 as described in section
22680 \begin_inset space ~
22684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22686 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22691 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22697 \begin_layout Standard
22698 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22708 height_special "totalheight"
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22713 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22719 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22723 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22733 height_special "totalheight"
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22738 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22746 \begin_layout Standard
22747 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22753 \begin_layout Standard
22754 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22756 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22763 \begin_inset space ~
22771 \begin_layout Chapter
22772 Mathematical Formulas
22773 \begin_inset Index idx
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 \begin_inset Index idx
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22817 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22824 \begin_layout Standard
22825 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22830 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22833 \begin_layout Section
22835 \begin_inset Index idx
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22861 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22863 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22864 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22865 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22867 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22873 \begin_layout Standard
22874 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22878 \begin_inset space ~
22883 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22886 \begin_layout Standard
22887 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22888 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22891 \begin_layout Standard
22892 This is a line with an inline formula
22893 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22899 \begin_layout Standard
22900 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22901 paragraph, like this one:
22902 \begin_inset Formula
22909 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22912 \begin_layout Standard
22913 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22914 For example, typing
22915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22928 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22929 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22933 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22936 \begin_inset space ~
22944 \begin_layout Subsection
22945 Navigating in Formulas
22946 \begin_inset Index idx
22949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 \begin_layout Standard
22959 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22960 achieved with the arrow keys.
22961 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22962 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22967 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22968 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22972 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22976 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22979 \end{array}\right]$
22987 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22992 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22993 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22996 \begin_layout Standard
23001 , printed in this document as
23002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23006 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23013 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23014 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23015 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23020 For example, if you want
23021 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23029 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23039 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23043 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23048 , since in the latter case only the
23051 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23056 will be under the square root sign:
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23063 \begin_layout Standard
23064 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23066 \begin_inset Formula
23068 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23077 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23078 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23081 \begin_layout Subsection
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23086 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23087 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23091 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23092 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23093 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23094 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23095 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23098 \begin_layout Subsection
23099 Exponents and Subscripts
23100 \begin_inset Index idx
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 \begin_inset Index idx
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 \begin_layout Standard
23123 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23126 arg "math-superscript"
23132 arg "math-subscript"
23135 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23137 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23140 , type in a formula
23143 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23153 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23159 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23163 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23169 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23175 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23184 , you have to use an extra
23188 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23189 For example, if you want
23190 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23196 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23202 Subscripts are similar: To get
23203 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23209 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23217 \begin_layout Subsection
23219 \begin_inset Index idx
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 \begin_layout Standard
23232 Create a fraction either with the command
23238 or by using the icon
23241 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23247 \begin_inset space ~
23253 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23254 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23255 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23260 To move back up, press
23265 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23266 \begin_inset Formula
23268 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23271 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23279 \begin_layout Subsection
23281 \begin_inset Index idx
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 \begin_layout Standard
23294 Roots can be created using the
23297 \begin_inset space ~
23305 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23311 arg "math-insert \\root"
23333 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23339 always produces a square root.
23342 \begin_layout Subsection
23343 Operators with Limits
23344 \begin_inset Index idx
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 \begin_inset Index idx
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23366 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23373 \begin_layout Standard
23375 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23379 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23382 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23383 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23384 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23385 The sum operator will automatically place its
23386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23393 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23395 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23399 \begin_inset Formula
23401 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23406 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23410 \begin_layout Standard
23411 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23413 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23414 behind the operator and using the menu
23416 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23417 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23419 \begin_inset space ~
23423 \begin_inset space ~
23437 \begin_layout Standard
23438 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23447 \begin_inset Index idx
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset Formula
23459 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23464 which will place the
23465 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23477 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23478 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23484 \begin_layout Standard
23485 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23492 Have a look at section
23493 \begin_inset space ~
23497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23499 reference "sub:Functions"
23503 for an explanation of function macros.
23506 \begin_layout Subsection
23508 \begin_inset Index idx
23511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 \begin_layout Standard
23521 Most math symbols can be found in the
23524 \begin_inset space ~
23529 under one of several categories; including
23546 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23550 \begin_layout Standard
23551 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23552 you don't have to use the
23555 \begin_inset space ~
23560 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23561 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23564 \begin_layout Subsection
23566 \begin_inset Index idx
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 \begin_layout Standard
23579 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23584 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23590 \begin_inset space ~
23598 arg "math-insert \\space"
23602 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23603 For example, the sequence
23608 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23612 \begin_inset Graphics
23613 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23618 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23619 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23620 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23621 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23623 Here are two examples:
23626 \begin_layout Standard
23636 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23642 \begin_layout Standard
23652 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23658 \begin_layout Subsection
23660 \begin_inset Index idx
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23672 name "sub:Functions"
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23683 \begin_inset space ~
23688 contains under the button
23691 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23694 a number of function macros, such as
23695 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23699 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23707 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23714 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23715 avoid confusions, because
23716 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23720 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23726 \begin_layout Standard
23727 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23729 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23733 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23739 \begin_layout Standard
23740 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23741 are placed, as described in section
23742 \begin_inset space ~
23746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23748 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23755 \begin_layout Subsection
23757 \begin_inset Index idx
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 \begin_layout Standard
23770 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23772 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23773 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23774 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23777 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23778 Our example is entered by typing
23783 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23790 \begin_inset space ~
23794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23796 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23800 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23803 \begin_layout Standard
23804 \begin_inset Float table
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23815 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23819 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 \begin_inset Tabular
23830 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23831 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23832 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23833 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23834 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24350 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24395 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24416 \begin_layout Standard
24417 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24420 \begin_inset space ~
24428 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24431 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24435 \begin_layout Section
24436 Brackets and Delimiters
24437 \begin_inset Index idx
24440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 \begin_inset Index idx
24450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24459 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24466 \begin_layout Standard
24467 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24468 For some purposes, using just the keys
24473 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24474 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24475 toolbar delimiter icon
24478 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24482 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24483 \begin_inset Formula
24485 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24493 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24494 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24498 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24501 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24507 \begin_inset Formula
24509 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24517 \begin_layout Standard
24518 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24519 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24523 \begin_layout Standard
24524 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24525 left side and right side.
24526 If you use the option
24529 \begin_inset space ~
24534 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24535 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24536 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24541 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24544 \begin_layout Standard
24545 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24546 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24547 is to go inside the brackets.
24548 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24553 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24554 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24555 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24559 arg "math-delim ( )"
24565 \begin_layout Section
24566 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24567 \begin_inset Index idx
24570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24577 \begin_inset Index idx
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24587 \begin_inset Index idx
24590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24599 \begin_layout Standard
24600 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24603 \begin_inset space ~
24611 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24615 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24616 Here is an example:
24617 \begin_inset Formula
24619 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24628 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24629 \begin_inset space ~
24633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24635 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24640 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24641 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24642 This alignment is set in the box
24647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24695 for every column as default.
24696 For example, the sequence
24697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24708 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24709 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24710 corresponds to the relevant column.
24711 The result will look like this:
24712 \begin_inset Formula
24715 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24716 column & has & has\, right\\
24717 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24726 \begin_layout Standard
24727 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24730 arg "newline-insert newline"
24733 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24734 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24736 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24739 or the math toolbar.
24742 \begin_layout Standard
24743 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24744 It can be created with the menu
24746 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24747 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24749 \begin_inset space ~
24761 Here is an example:
24762 \begin_inset Formula
24776 \begin_layout Standard
24777 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24780 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24783 arg "newline-insert newline"
24787 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24792 arg "newline-insert newline"
24795 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24803 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24804 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24805 A new row is created by every further entry of
24808 arg "newline-insert newline"
24812 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24813 Here is an example:
24814 \begin_inset Formula
24816 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24817 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24822 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24823 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24824 \begin_inset Formula
24826 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24834 \begin_layout Standard
24835 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24842 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24843 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24846 reference "eq:asquared"
24851 The other types are described in section
24852 \begin_inset space ~
24856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24858 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24865 \begin_layout Section
24866 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24867 \begin_inset Index idx
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24871 Math ! Formula numbering
24877 \begin_inset Index idx
24880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 Math ! Referencing formulas
24887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24889 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24896 \begin_layout Standard
24897 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24899 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24900 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24902 \begin_inset space ~
24906 \begin_inset space ~
24914 arg "math-number-toggle"
24918 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24919 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24920 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24921 the document class.
24922 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24923 separated by a dot:
24924 \begin_inset Formula
24934 arg "math-number-toggle"
24937 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24938 You can only number displayed formulas.
24941 \begin_layout Standard
24942 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24944 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24945 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24947 \begin_inset space ~
24951 \begin_inset space ~
24959 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24962 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24963 \begin_inset Formula
24966 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24972 To number all lines use the shortcut
24975 arg "math-number-toggle"
24981 \begin_layout Standard
24982 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24985 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24986 A label is inserted with the menu
24988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24997 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24998 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24999 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25011 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25012 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25013 We inserted in the following example the label
25014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25021 in the second line:
25022 \begin_inset Formula
25024 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25025 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25030 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25031 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25032 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25034 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25036 \begin_inset space ~
25044 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25048 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25049 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25050 as the formula number:
25053 \begin_layout Standard
25054 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25057 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25064 \begin_layout Standard
25065 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25066 \begin_inset space ~
25070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25072 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25077 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25085 \begin_layout Section
25086 User defined math macros
25087 \begin_inset Index idx
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 \begin_layout Standard
25100 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25101 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25102 Math macros are explained in section
25105 \begin_inset space ~
25117 \begin_layout Section
25121 \begin_layout Subsection
25123 \begin_inset Index idx
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 \begin_layout Standard
25136 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25137 To set a font in a formula, use the
25140 \begin_inset space ~
25148 arg "math-insert \\font"
25151 , or enter its command, listed in table
25152 \begin_inset space ~
25156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25158 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25165 \begin_layout Standard
25166 \begin_inset Float table
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25177 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25181 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 \begin_inset Tabular
25192 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25193 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25194 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25227 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25429 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25488 \begin_layout Standard
25489 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25490 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25495 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25496 space when you need a space in the box.
25497 Here is an example where
25498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25509 denotes the set of numbers:
25510 \begin_inset Formula
25512 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25520 \begin_layout Standard
25521 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25522 You can, for example, put a character in
25531 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25535 \begin_inset Newline newline
25538 So it is better not to use this feature.
25541 \begin_layout Standard
25542 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25543 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25547 \begin_inset Newline newline
25550 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25556 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25557 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25563 \begin_layout Standard
25570 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25573 \begin_layout Standard
25574 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25576 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25577 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25579 \begin_inset space ~
25587 \begin_layout Subsection
25589 \begin_inset Index idx
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 \begin_layout Standard
25602 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25604 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25608 \begin_inset space ~
25612 \begin_inset space ~
25620 \begin_inset space ~
25628 arg "math-insert \\font"
25632 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25633 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25634 Here is an example:
25635 \begin_inset Formula
25638 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25639 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25648 \begin_layout Subsection
25650 \begin_inset Index idx
25653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25662 \begin_layout Standard
25663 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25664 automatically chosen in most situations.
25682 For most characters,
25690 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25691 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25696 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25697 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25699 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25702 arg "math-insert \\style"
25706 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25707 For example, you can set
25708 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25711 , which is normally in
25720 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25724 The four styles are used in the following example:
25727 \begin_layout Standard
25728 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25732 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25736 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25740 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25746 \begin_layout Standard
25747 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25748 is set in a particular size with the menu
25750 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25752 \begin_inset space ~
25757 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25758 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25759 will be adjusted to correspond.
25760 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25771 \begin_layout Standard
25775 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25781 \begin_layout Section
25783 \begin_inset Index idx
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25793 \begin_inset Index idx
25796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25805 \begin_layout Standard
25806 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25807 (AMS) that are in common use.
25810 \begin_layout Subsection
25811 Enabling AMS-Support
25814 \begin_layout Standard
25815 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25816 the document by selecting the checkbox
25819 \begin_inset space ~
25823 \begin_inset space ~
25827 \begin_inset space ~
25834 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25838 \begin_inset Index idx
25841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25842 Document ! Settings
25850 \begin_inset space ~
25856 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25857 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25860 \begin_layout Subsection
25862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25864 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25869 \begin_inset Index idx
25872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25873 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25883 LyX allows you to choose between
25904 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25905 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25911 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25914 \begin_layout Chapter
25918 \begin_layout Section
25920 \begin_inset Index idx
25923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25932 name "sec:Cross-References"
25939 \begin_layout Standard
25940 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25941 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25943 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25944 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25945 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25948 \begin_layout Enumerate
25952 \begin_layout Enumerate
25953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25955 name "enu:Second-item"
25962 \begin_layout Enumerate
25966 \begin_layout Standard
25967 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25969 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25972 or by pressing the toolbar button
25979 A gray label box like this:
25980 \begin_inset Graphics
25981 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25986 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25987 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26022 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26023 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26039 \begin_layout Standard
26040 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26042 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26045 or the toolbar button
26048 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26052 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26053 \begin_inset Graphics
26054 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26059 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26061 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26074 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26078 \begin_layout Standard
26079 As an alternative to
26081 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26084 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26089 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26090 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26092 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26106 \begin_inset space ~
26110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26112 reference "enu:Second-item"
26119 \begin_layout Standard
26120 It is recommended to use a protected space
26124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26125 described in section
26126 \begin_inset space ~
26130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26132 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26141 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26142 line breaks between them.
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 There are six formats of cross-references:
26149 \begin_layout Description
26150 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26153 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26160 \begin_layout Description
26161 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26162 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26174 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26181 \begin_layout Description
26182 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26183 \begin_inset space ~
26187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26188 LatexCommand pageref
26189 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26196 \begin_layout Description
26198 \begin_inset space ~
26202 \begin_inset space ~
26205 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26207 LatexCommand vpageref
26208 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26213 \begin_inset Newline newline
26216 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26217 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26218 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26219 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26220 it prints “on the next page”.
26221 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26224 \begin_layout Description
26226 \begin_inset space ~
26230 \begin_inset space ~
26234 \begin_inset space ~
26237 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26240 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26245 \begin_inset Newline newline
26248 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26254 ; otherwise it behaves like
26258 \begin_inset space ~
26262 \begin_inset space ~
26271 \begin_layout Description
26273 \begin_inset space ~
26276 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26277 \begin_inset Newline newline
26281 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26289 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26298 \begin_inset Index idx
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26302 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26308 \begin_inset Index idx
26311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26312 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26323 \begin_inset Newline newline
26326 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26329 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26333 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26334 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26342 is the default and preferred because
26346 supports only English documents.
26347 The format is specified by using the command
26359 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26360 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26373 ) can be done with this command
26374 \begin_inset Newline newline
26381 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26386 \begin_inset Newline newline
26389 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26393 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26400 \begin_layout Description
26402 \begin_inset space ~
26405 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26407 LatexCommand nameref
26408 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26415 \begin_layout Standard
26416 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26417 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26418 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26422 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26426 \begin_layout Standard
26427 You can only use the style
26431 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26435 is always possible.
26438 \begin_layout Standard
26439 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26440 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26442 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26443 \begin_inset space ~
26447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26449 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26456 \begin_layout Standard
26457 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26461 \begin_inset space ~
26465 \begin_inset space ~
26470 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26471 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26474 \begin_inset space ~
26479 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26480 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26483 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26489 \begin_layout Standard
26490 You can change labels at any time.
26491 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26492 do not need to think about this.
26495 \begin_layout Standard
26496 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26497 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26498 instead of the reference.
26501 \begin_layout Standard
26502 References are described in detail in the section
26503 \begin_inset space ~
26507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26525 \begin_layout Section
26526 Table of Contents and other Listings
26527 \begin_inset Index idx
26530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26537 \begin_inset Index idx
26540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26556 \begin_layout Subsection
26558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26560 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26567 \begin_layout Standard
26568 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26570 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26571 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26583 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26584 If you click on it, the
26588 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26589 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26590 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26592 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26594 \begin_inset space ~
26599 that is described in section
26600 \begin_inset space ~
26604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26606 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26615 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26617 \begin_inset space ~
26621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26623 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26627 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26629 \begin_inset space ~
26633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26635 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26639 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26641 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26644 \begin_layout Subsection
26645 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26648 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26655 \begin_layout Standard
26656 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26658 You can insert them via the
26660 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26664 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26667 \begin_layout Section
26668 URLs and Hyperlinks
26669 \begin_inset Index idx
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 \begin_inset Index idx
26682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 \begin_layout Subsection
26693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26703 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26705 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26713 \begin_inset Flex URL
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26726 \begin_layout Standard
26727 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26733 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26746 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26754 \begin_layout Subsection
26756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26758 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26765 \begin_layout Standard
26766 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26768 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26771 or with the toolbar button
26778 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26787 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26788 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26791 name "LyX's homepage"
26792 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26796 , an Email address like this:
26797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26799 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26800 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26805 , or a link to a file.
26808 \begin_layout Standard
26809 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26822 to the link target.
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26827 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26828 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26829 the text style dialog.
26830 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26836 name "LyX's homepage"
26837 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26849 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26851 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26852 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26856 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26858 \begin_inset Newline newline
26866 \begin_inset Newline newline
26873 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26876 \begin_layout Section
26878 \begin_inset Index idx
26881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26890 name "sec:Appendices"
26897 \begin_layout Standard
26898 Appendices are created with the menu
26900 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26902 \begin_inset space ~
26906 \begin_inset space ~
26912 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26913 as the appendix part of the book.
26914 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26917 \begin_layout Standard
26918 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26919 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26920 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26921 and the subsection number.
26922 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26926 \begin_layout Standard
26928 \begin_inset space ~
26932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26934 reference "chap:Credits"
26939 \begin_inset space ~
26943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26945 reference "sub:Export"
26952 \begin_layout Section
26954 \begin_inset Index idx
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26966 name "sec:Bibliography"
26973 \begin_layout Standard
26974 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26975 You can include a bibliography database,
26979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26980 Known under the name
26981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26993 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26994 manually, using the paragraph environment
26998 , which was described in section
26999 \begin_inset space ~
27003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27005 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
27010 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27011 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27015 use a bibliography database.
27018 \begin_layout Subsection
27019 The Bibliography Environment
27022 \begin_layout Standard
27027 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27029 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27038 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27040 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27049 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27053 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27055 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27058 or the toolbar button
27061 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27065 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27066 containing the available citations.
27067 Select one or more keys from the list and
27077 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27078 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27082 \begin_layout Standard
27083 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27084 entry with surrounding brackets.
27089 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27090 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27102 \begin_layout Standard
27105 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27110 key "latexcompanion"
27117 \begin_layout Standard
27118 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27119 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27128 \begin_layout Standard
27129 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27132 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27134 \begin_inset space ~
27142 arg "layout-paragraph"
27146 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27149 \begin_layout Subsection
27150 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27151 \begin_inset Index idx
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27155 Bibliography ! Databases
27161 \begin_inset Index idx
27164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27165 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27173 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27180 \begin_layout Standard
27181 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27189 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27190 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27195 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27197 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27198 your working field in a database.
27199 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27200 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27201 list for that document.
27202 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27206 \begin_layout Standard
27207 The database is a text file with the file extension
27208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27219 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27220 The format is explained in
27221 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27227 and in the LaTeX books (
27228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27230 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27235 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27236 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27237 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27238 \begin_inset Flex URL
27241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27243 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27251 \begin_layout Standard
27252 To use a database, use the menu
27254 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27259 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27272 \begin_inset space ~
27278 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27279 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27286 Add bibliography to TOC
27288 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27293 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27294 in the document or just the cited references.
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27298 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27310 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27311 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27312 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27314 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27321 \begin_inset Newline newline
27325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27327 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27343 \begin_layout Standard
27344 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27345 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27351 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27352 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27357 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27358 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27359 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 The following variants are possible:
27377 \begin_layout Description
27378 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27379 with other bibliography packages (e.
27380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27384 \begin_inset space \space{}
27391 ), only with the package
27395 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27399 \begin_layout Description
27400 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27401 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27402 with all bibliography packages, except
27407 \begin_layout Description
27408 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27413 , works with all bibliography packages
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27417 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27419 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27434 \begin_layout Standard
27435 When you select the option
27437 Sectioned bibliography
27441 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27442 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27445 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27446 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27448 Customizing Bibliographies
27456 Additional Features
27461 \begin_layout Standard
27462 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27463 the two methods of creating them.
27464 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27465 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27466 We used the style file
27470 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27473 \begin_layout Subsection
27474 Bibliography layout
27475 \begin_inset Index idx
27478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27479 Bibliography ! Layout
27487 \begin_layout Standard
27488 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27489 For this feature you need to enable the option
27495 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27499 \begin_inset Index idx
27502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27503 Document ! Settings
27513 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27514 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27515 in the previous section.
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27519 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27520 the citation reference window.
27521 Here is an example where the text
27522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27526 \begin_inset space ~
27530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27533 appears after the reference:
27536 \begin_layout Standard
27538 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27541 key "latexcompanion"
27548 \begin_layout Section
27550 \begin_inset Index idx
27553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27569 \begin_layout Standard
27570 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27572 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27574 \begin_inset space ~
27579 or the toolbar button
27586 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27587 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27588 by LyX as the index entry.
27591 \begin_layout Standard
27592 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27594 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27595 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27597 \begin_inset space ~
27603 A light blue box labeled
27604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27615 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27616 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27619 \begin_layout Standard
27620 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27621 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27623 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27625 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27632 \begin_layout Subsection
27633 Grouping Index Entries
27634 \begin_inset Index idx
27637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27647 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27649 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27650 lists under the entry
27651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27659 First we create the entry
27660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27668 \begin_inset space ~
27672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27674 reference "sub:Lists"
27679 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27680 \begin_inset space ~
27684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27686 reference "sec:Itemize"
27690 , we insert the command
27693 \begin_layout Standard
27699 \begin_layout Standard
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27710 for the enumerated list in section
27711 \begin_inset space ~
27715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27717 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27724 \begin_layout Standard
27725 The exclamation mark
27726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27733 marks the grouping levels.
27734 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27735 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27736 If we don't have an index entry for
27737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27744 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27747 \begin_layout Subsection
27749 \begin_inset Index idx
27752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 Index ! Page ranges
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27762 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27764 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27765 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27766 an index entry in section
27767 \begin_inset space ~
27771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27773 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27783 Paragraph environments|(
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 and another entry at the end of section
27788 \begin_inset space ~
27792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27794 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27801 \begin_layout Standard
27804 Paragraph environments|)
27807 \begin_layout Standard
27809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27832 respectively start and end the index range.
27833 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27834 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27835 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27836 An example is the index entry
27837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27840 Document ! Settings
27841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27847 \begin_layout Subsection
27849 \begin_inset Index idx
27852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 Index ! Cross referencing
27861 \begin_layout Standard
27862 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27863 We referred for example in the index entry
27864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27872 \begin_inset space ~
27876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27878 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27882 ) to the index entry
27883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27890 in the same section using the entry
27893 \begin_layout Standard
27896 GIF|see{Image formats}
27899 \begin_layout Standard
27900 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27901 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27902 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27905 \begin_layout Subsection
27907 \begin_inset Index idx
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 Index ! Entry order
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27920 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27921 follow the rules for the index order.
27922 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27935 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27944 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27945 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27970 \begin_inset Index idx
27973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27974 Dummy entries ! maïs
27980 \begin_inset Index idx
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27984 Dummy entries ! maître
27990 \begin_inset Index idx
27993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27994 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27999 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28000 maïs, maison, maître.
28001 To achieve this, we use the command
28004 \begin_layout Standard
28007 previous entry@current entry
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 In our case we want to have
28012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28027 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28037 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28038 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28039 See the next subsection for an example.
28042 \begin_layout Standard
28043 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28049 \begin_layout Standard
28050 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28055 to generate the index (see sec.
28056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28062 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28071 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28079 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28083 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28084 index commands start with
28085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28097 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28102 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28105 \begin_layout Standard
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28129 \begin_layout Subsection
28131 \begin_inset Index idx
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 Index ! Entry layout
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28144 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28145 \begin_inset Index idx
28148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28151 This is an italic dummy entry
28156 You can also format the page number using the character
28157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28164 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28165 We can write for example
28168 \begin_layout Standard
28171 italic page number:|textit
28174 \begin_layout Standard
28175 to get the page number in italic.
28176 \begin_inset Index idx
28179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28185 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28209 Have a look at section
28210 \begin_inset space ~
28214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28216 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28220 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28223 \begin_layout Standard
28224 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28232 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28236 to generate the index, see sec.
28237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28243 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28252 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28257 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28261 key "latexcompanion"
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28274 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28276 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28277 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28278 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28279 If so, put the following in the preamble
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28298 \begin_layout Standard
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28305 in the index entry.
28306 \begin_inset Index idx
28309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28310 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28315 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28316 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28317 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28322 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28323 a bold font for all index entries.
28324 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28336 documentation for details,
28337 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28339 key "makeindex,xindy"
28346 \begin_layout Subsection
28348 \begin_inset Index idx
28351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28360 name "sub:Index-Program"
28367 \begin_layout Standard
28368 If the index generation program
28372 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28376 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28385 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28386 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28387 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28388 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28389 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28399 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28400 dialog, see section
28401 \begin_inset space ~
28405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28407 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28412 The available options are listed and explained in
28413 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28415 key "makeindex,xindy"
28420 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28424 \begin_layout Standard
28425 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28426 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28429 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28430 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28434 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28435 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28438 \begin_layout Subsection
28442 \begin_layout Standard
28443 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28444 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28452 next to the standard index.
28453 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28454 that add this feature.
28460 \begin_inset Index idx
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28464 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28469 package to generate multiple indexes.
28470 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28475 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28483 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28484 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28485 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28496 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28497 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28500 and select the option
28502 Use multiple Indexes
28509 already contains the standard index
28510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28518 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28519 also appear as a heading) to the
28523 input field and press the
28528 The new index now also appears in the list.
28529 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28533 \begin_layout Standard
28534 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28537 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28544 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28545 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28546 are additional features:
28549 \begin_layout Itemize
28550 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28551 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28554 \begin_layout Itemize
28555 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28556 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28564 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28565 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28566 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28567 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28570 \begin_layout Section
28571 Nomenclature/Glossary
28572 \begin_inset Index idx
28575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28582 \begin_inset Index idx
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28616 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28625 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28626 called nomenclature or glossary.
28629 \begin_layout Standard
28630 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28636 \begin_inset Index idx
28639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28640 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28646 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28647 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28653 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28656 \begin_layout Standard
28657 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28658 and then use the menu
28660 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28666 \begin_inset space ~
28671 or the toolbar button
28674 arg "nomencl-insert"
28679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28690 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28693 \begin_layout Standard
28694 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28695 The first is the term or
28699 that you wish to define.
28704 of the term or symbol.
28707 \begin_layout Standard
28708 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28716 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28724 \begin_layout Subsection
28725 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28726 \begin_inset Index idx
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 Nomenclature ! Layout
28738 \begin_layout Standard
28739 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28743 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28749 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28757 \begin_inset Newline newline
28765 \begin_inset Newline newline
28771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28778 character starts/ends the formula.
28779 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28791 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28801 \begin_layout Standard
28802 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28803 \begin_inset space ~
28807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28809 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28816 \begin_layout Standard
28820 \begin_inset space ~
28825 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28826 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28831 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28838 in this document is:
28839 \begin_inset Newline newline
28844 dummy entry for the character
28849 \begin_inset Newline newline
28861 \begin_inset space ~
28871 font use the command
28900 \begin_layout Standard
28901 If the characters |
28902 \begin_inset space \space{}
28906 \begin_inset space \space{}
28910 \begin_inset space \space{}
28914 \begin_inset space \space{}
28918 \begin_inset space \space{}
28921 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28922 a quote character in front of them.
28923 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28924 LatexCommand nomenclature
28925 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28926 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28933 \begin_layout Subsection
28934 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28935 \begin_inset Index idx
28938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28939 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28947 \begin_layout Standard
28948 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28949 the symbol definition.
28950 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28952 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28955 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28956 LatexCommand nomenclature
28958 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28965 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28969 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28970 LatexCommand nomenclature
28973 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28978 They will be sorted by
28979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29008 will be sorted before the
29012 since the character
29013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29020 is considered in sorting.
29023 \begin_layout Standard
29024 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29027 \begin_inset space ~
29032 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29033 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29035 For the example given, you can insert
29039 in this field for the
29040 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29047 will be located before
29048 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29054 \begin_layout Standard
29055 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29069 \begin_layout Subsection
29070 Nomenclature Options
29071 \begin_inset Index idx
29074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29075 Nomenclature ! Options
29083 \begin_layout Standard
29088 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29089 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29092 \begin_layout Description
29093 refeq Appends the phrase
29094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29109 to every nomenclature entry, where
29115 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29118 \begin_layout Description
29119 refpage Appends the phrase
29120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29135 to every nomenclature entry, where
29141 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29144 \begin_layout Description
29145 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29148 \begin_layout Standard
29149 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29150 class options list in the
29152 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29156 In this document the options
29163 \begin_layout Standard
29164 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29172 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29177 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29180 \begin_layout Description
29190 \begin_layout Description
29193 nomrefpage Like the
29200 \begin_layout Description
29203 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29212 \begin_layout Description
29216 \begin_inset space ~
29222 \begin_inset space ~
29227 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29239 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29240 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29243 \begin_layout Standard
29251 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29254 \begin_inset Newline newline
29261 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29266 \begin_inset Newline newline
29270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29285 by their translation.
29288 \begin_layout Subsection
29289 Printing the Nomenclature
29290 \begin_inset Index idx
29293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29294 Nomenclature ! Printing
29302 \begin_layout Standard
29303 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29305 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29306 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29322 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29323 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29324 You can choose between these settings:
29327 \begin_layout Description
29328 Default a space of 1
29329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29335 \begin_layout Description
29337 \begin_inset space ~
29341 \begin_inset space ~
29344 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29347 \begin_layout Description
29348 Custom custom space
29351 \begin_layout Standard
29352 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29361 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29369 For example, in order to change the name to
29373 , add the following line to the preamble:
29376 \begin_layout Standard
29384 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29387 \begin_layout Subsection
29388 Nomenclature Program
29389 \begin_inset Index idx
29392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29393 Nomenclature ! Program
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29401 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 LyX uses the program
29413 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29414 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29419 by adding options, see section
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29426 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29431 The available options are listed and explained in
29432 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29434 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29441 \begin_layout Section
29443 \begin_inset Index idx
29446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29453 \begin_inset Index idx
29456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29457 Document ! Branches
29463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29465 name "sec:Branches"
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29473 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29474 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29475 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29476 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29479 \begin_layout Standard
29480 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29481 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29482 To create a branch, either select the menu
29484 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29485 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29488 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29490 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29497 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29498 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29499 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29500 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29501 (see below for an example).
29502 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29503 to the name of the other) and to add
29504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29516 \begin_inset space ~
29519 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29520 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29523 \begin_layout Standard
29524 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29525 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29527 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29530 where you can choose a branch.
29531 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29535 \begin_layout Standard
29536 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29537 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29540 \begin_layout Standard
29541 \begin_inset Branch Question
29544 \begin_layout Standard
29545 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29553 \begin_layout Standard
29554 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29557 \begin_layout Standard
29558 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29573 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29574 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29577 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29578 Consider for example a file
29579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29586 which has the above branches.
29588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29595 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29619 branch were inactive,
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29635 branch was active, likewise
29636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29651 branch was active, and
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29655 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29659 if both branches were active.
29660 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29663 \begin_layout Standard
29664 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29670 \begin_layout Standard
29671 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29672 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29674 For example you can define for the question branch
29678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29679 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29680 \begin_inset space ~
29684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29686 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29718 \begin_layout Standard
29719 and for the answer branch
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29742 \begin_layout Standard
29743 \begin_inset Branch Question
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29779 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29782 \begin_layout Standard
29786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 Now it is possible to use the
29819 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29826 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29829 commands to obtain conditional output.
29830 Here is an example formula where only the
29837 \begin_inset Formula
29839 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29847 \begin_layout Standard
29848 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29856 \begin_layout Standard
29857 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29863 \begin_inset space \space{}
29866 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29867 For this advanced usage, see the
29872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29875 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29882 \begin_layout Section
29884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29886 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29891 \begin_inset Index idx
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29903 \begin_layout Standard
29906 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29907 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29910 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29912 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29917 \begin_inset Index idx
29920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29921 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29926 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29927 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29928 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29929 part of the document.
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29934 The header information in the dialog tab
29938 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29939 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29940 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29941 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29945 \begin_inset space ~
29949 \begin_inset space ~
29954 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29955 title and author entries.
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset space ~
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29972 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29975 \begin_layout Standard
29976 You can specify in the dialog tab
29980 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29985 \begin_inset space ~
29989 \begin_inset space ~
29993 \begin_inset space ~
29998 option allows long links to be split;
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30005 \begin_inset space ~
30009 \begin_inset space ~
30017 \begin_inset space ~
30022 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30025 \begin_inset space ~
30030 colors the different links.
30031 The default colors are:
30034 \begin_layout Labeling
30035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30040 for hyperlinks and URLs
30043 \begin_layout Labeling
30044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30052 \begin_layout Labeling
30053 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 but you can change these in the field
30067 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30070 \begin_layout Standard
30073 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30076 \begin_layout Standard
30081 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30082 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30083 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30086 \begin_layout Standard
30091 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30092 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30093 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30103 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30104 when opening the PDF.
30106 \begin_inset space ~
30109 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30110 \begin_inset space ~
30113 1 will only display the sections.
30116 \begin_layout Standard
30117 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30118 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30124 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30134 \begin_layout Section
30135 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30138 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30145 \begin_layout Subsection
30147 \begin_inset Index idx
30150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30159 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30166 \begin_layout Standard
30167 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30168 constructs, but not all.
30169 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30170 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30171 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30172 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30173 and their commands.
30176 \begin_layout Standard
30177 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30179 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30181 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30194 \begin_inset space ~
30199 or by the toolbar button
30212 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30221 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30222 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30223 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30224 using the LaTeX-command
30230 , you can write the command part
30236 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30240 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30241 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30242 the following example:
30245 \begin_layout Standard
30246 \begin_inset Graphics
30247 filename clipart/ERT.png
30255 \begin_layout Standard
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30260 This is a line with a
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30288 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30297 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30305 \begin_layout Subsection
30306 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30307 \begin_inset Argument 1
30310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 \begin_inset Index idx
30320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30329 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30338 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30339 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30348 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30349 any time if you know the right commands.
30350 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30351 is the end of the day.
30352 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30353 all caption labels bold.
30354 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30356 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30360 \begin_layout Standard
30361 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30362 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30363 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30365 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30375 As result you find that the package
30380 \begin_inset Index idx
30383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30390 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30392 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30395 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30410 \begin_inset space ~
30418 \begin_layout Standard
30423 usepackage[options]{package name}
30426 \begin_layout Standard
30427 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30428 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30429 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30433 In your case the package name is
30438 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30443 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30444 So you add the command
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30452 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30455 \begin_layout Standard
30456 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30461 For more commands provided by the
30465 package, have a look at its documentation,
30466 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30480 \begin_layout Standard
30481 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30483 For example if you use a
30487 class, you don't need the package
30491 , you can instead write
30494 \begin_layout Standard
30499 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30506 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30507 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30514 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30519 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30521 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30522 the previous section.
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30526 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30528 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30530 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30537 \begin_layout Standard
30538 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 \begin_inset Note Note
30561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30562 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30570 \begin_layout Left Header
30571 \begin_inset Argument 1
30574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 \begin_inset Note Note
30597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30598 defines the header line as described below
30606 \begin_layout Center Header
30607 \begin_inset Argument 1
30610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30619 \begin_layout Right Header
30620 \begin_inset Argument 1
30623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30644 \begin_layout Left Footer
30645 \begin_inset Argument 1
30648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30669 \begin_layout Center Footer
30670 \begin_inset Argument 1
30673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30684 \begin_inset Newline newline
30688 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30694 \begin_layout Right Footer
30695 \begin_inset Argument 1
30698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30720 \begin_layout Section
30721 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30724 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30729 \begin_inset Index idx
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30733 Document ! Header/Footer line
30739 \begin_inset Index idx
30742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30751 \begin_layout Standard
30752 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30756 \begin_inset space ~
30767 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30773 \begin_inset space ~
30779 As a second step add in the menu
30781 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30782 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30789 Custom Header/Footerlines
30790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30794 This module offers the following 6
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30801 \begin_layout Description
30803 \begin_inset space ~
30807 \begin_inset space ~
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30819 \begin_inset space ~
30825 \begin_layout Description
30827 \begin_inset space ~
30831 \begin_inset space ~
30835 \begin_inset space ~
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30843 \begin_inset space ~
30849 \begin_layout Standard
30850 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30853 \begin_layout Standard
30854 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30855 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30863 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30867 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30870 \begin_layout Standard
30871 \begin_inset Float figure
30877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 \begin_inset Tabular
30881 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30882 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30883 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30884 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30885 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30945 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30949 The normal text on the page goes here.
30950 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30952 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30953 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30958 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31043 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31048 name "fig:Page-layout"
31052 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31065 \begin_layout Standard
31066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31074 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31078 \begin_inset space ~
31083 is set to “Default”.
31084 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31093 \begin_layout Subsection
31097 \begin_layout Standard
31098 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31099 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31100 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31101 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31103 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31104 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31107 \begin_layout Standard
31108 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31111 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 \begin_inset space ~
31132 \begin_layout Description
31135 thepage prints the current page number
31138 \begin_layout Description
31141 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31144 \begin_layout Description
31147 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31150 \begin_layout Description
31153 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31154 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31161 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31164 because it usually goes in a left header.
31167 \begin_layout Description
31170 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31171 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31173 It is normally used in the right header.
31176 \begin_layout Subsection
31177 Default header/footer
31180 \begin_layout Standard
31181 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31182 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31183 footer has the page number.
31184 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31185 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31186 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31189 \begin_inset space ~
31197 \begin_layout Subsection
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31202 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31203 Some pages are different.
31204 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31205 a new part or chapter in your book.
31206 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31207 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31208 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31212 Header and footer decoration line
31215 \begin_layout Standard
31216 By default, you get a 0.4
31217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31220 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31221 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31233 in the following way:
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31243 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31246 \begin_layout Standard
31247 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31256 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31263 \begin_layout Standard
31264 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31265 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31266 \begin_inset space ~
31270 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31280 Several header/footer lines
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31284 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31285 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31286 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31288 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31302 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31303 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 \begin_inset space ~
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31331 headheight}{height}
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 where height is a size in standard units.
31336 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31337 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31338 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31340 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31357 \begin_inset space ~
31362 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31367 \begin_inset Index idx
31370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31371 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31377 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31378 for your header/footer.
31381 \begin_layout Subsection
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31386 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31387 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31388 This example consists of the following definition:
31391 \begin_layout Description
31393 \begin_inset space ~
31402 , empty optional argument
31405 \begin_layout Description
31407 \begin_inset space ~
31410 Header empty, empty optional argument
31413 \begin_layout Description
31415 \begin_inset space ~
31424 in the optional argument
31427 \begin_layout Description
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31438 in the optional argument
31441 \begin_layout Description
31443 \begin_inset space ~
31455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31459 \begin_inset Newline newline
31463 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31470 in the optional argument
31473 \begin_layout Description
31475 \begin_inset space ~
31484 , empty optional argument
31487 \begin_layout Description
31490 headrulewidth set to 2
31491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31497 \begin_layout Standard
31498 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31499 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31505 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31514 \begin_layout Standard
31515 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31521 \begin_layout Standard
31525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31529 pagestyle{headings}
31535 \begin_inset Note Note
31538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31539 switches back to page style with the default headings
31547 \begin_layout Section
31548 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31551 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31556 \begin_inset Index idx
31559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31566 \begin_inset Index idx
31569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31578 \begin_layout Standard
31579 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31580 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31581 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31584 \begin_layout Subsection
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31594 \begin_inset Index idx
31597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31598 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31603 (on some systems named simply
31608 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31610 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31616 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31617 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31625 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31626 automatically installed together with LyX.
31629 \begin_layout Subsection
31633 \begin_layout Standard
31634 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31635 LaTeX, activate the option
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31645 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31651 \begin_inset space ~
31655 \begin_inset space ~
31658 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31665 \begin_inset space ~
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31683 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31686 \begin_layout Standard
31687 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31708 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31712 \begin_layout Standard
31713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31721 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31722 generated by activating the option
31725 \begin_inset space ~
31731 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31739 \begin_layout Subsection
31740 Selected document parts
31743 \begin_layout Standard
31744 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31745 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31746 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31747 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31749 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31753 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31754 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31755 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31758 \begin_layout Standard
31759 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31765 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31776 is explained in section
31778 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31783 \begin_inset space ~
31793 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31794 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31796 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31798 Here is the result:
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31802 \begin_inset Preview
31804 \begin_layout Standard
31809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31819 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31829 height_special "totalheight"
31832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31863 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31886 Previewing works also for colors.
31887 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31905 is explained in section
31912 \begin_inset space ~
31925 \begin_layout Standard
31926 \begin_inset Preview
31928 \begin_layout Standard
31932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31951 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31956 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31975 \begin_layout Standard
31976 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31984 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31985 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31987 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31988 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31989 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31990 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31994 \begin_layout Subsection
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
32002 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32004 \begin_inset space ~
32009 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
32010 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32012 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32013 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32014 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32015 the source view window.
32020 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32021 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32022 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32025 \begin_layout Section
32026 Advanced Find and Replace
32027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32029 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32034 \begin_inset Index idx
32037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 \begin_inset Index idx
32047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32056 \begin_layout Subsection
32060 \begin_layout Standard
32061 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32062 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32063 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32064 The key-features are:
32067 \begin_layout Itemize
32068 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32069 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32070 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32074 \begin_layout Itemize
32075 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32076 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32077 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32078 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32081 \begin_layout Itemize
32082 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32083 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32084 outside of mathematics environments
32087 \begin_layout Itemize
32088 Search may be widened to a specific
32093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32097 \begin_inset space ~
32100 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32101 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32108 \begin_layout Itemize
32109 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32110 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32115 \begin_inset space ~
32118 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32121 \begin_layout Subsection
32125 \begin_layout Standard
32126 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32128 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32141 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32144 ) or the toolbar button
32147 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32153 Advanced Find and Replace
32158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32167 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32171 \begin_inset space ~
32176 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32179 arg "paragraph-break"
32183 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32184 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32188 arg "paragraph-break"
32191 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32195 searches backwards.
32198 \begin_layout Standard
32202 \begin_inset space ~
32207 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32216 \begin_inset space ~
32221 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32224 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32225 Searching for mathematics
32228 \begin_layout Standard
32229 Mathematical formulas, such as
32230 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32233 or something more complex like
32234 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32237 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32242 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32243 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32244 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32245 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32255 \begin_layout Standard
32256 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32257 This is done by switching to the
32261 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32266 This way, entering in the
32273 \begin_layout Itemize
32274 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32275 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32278 \begin_layout Itemize
32279 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32280 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32283 \begin_layout Itemize
32284 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32285 of it only within section headings.
32286 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32287 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32291 \begin_layout Itemize
32292 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32293 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32300 \begin_layout Standard
32301 The entries made in the
32305 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32308 \begin_inset space ~
32314 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32318 button or alternatively press
32321 arg "paragraph-break"
32328 while the cursor is in the
32331 \begin_inset space ~
32339 \begin_layout Standard
32340 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32341 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32345 \begin_layout Itemize
32346 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32347 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32355 with its typewriter version
32356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32370 \begin_layout Itemize
32371 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32377 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32389 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32396 (you may want to enable the
32399 \begin_inset space ~
32407 \begin_inset space ~
32412 options and disable the
32420 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32428 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32429 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32433 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32436 , or occurrences of
32437 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32441 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32447 \begin_layout Subsection
32451 \begin_layout Standard
32452 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32457 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32461 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32470 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32476 This is done with the context menu
32478 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32479 Insert Regular Expression
32481 while the cursor is in the
32486 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32487 expression matching rules
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32492 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32498 \begin_inset space ~
32501 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32502 to match expressions.
32507 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32508 same text in the document.
32509 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32510 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32513 \begin_layout Enumerate
32514 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32519 editor the fraction
32520 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32524 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32527 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32528 fractions with the given denominator.
32531 \begin_layout Enumerate
32532 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32544 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32549 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32550 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32551 Also, by inserting a
32552 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32555 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32556 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32559 \begin_layout Standard
32560 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32561 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32562 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32565 , and referring back to them through
32566 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32570 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32574 For example, try searching with the regexp
32575 \begin_inset Newline newline
32578 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32581 \begin_inset Newline newline
32584 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32587 \begin_layout Standard
32588 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32592 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32600 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32601 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32602 sub-expressions is absolute.
32604 \begin_inset space ~
32608 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32611 always refers to the first occurrence of
32612 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32615 in all entered regexps.
32623 \begin_layout Section
32625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32627 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32632 \begin_inset Index idx
32635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32644 \begin_layout Standard
32645 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32648 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32655 key or the toolbar button
32658 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32661 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32662 beginning of the currently selected text.
32663 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32664 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32665 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32666 scrolled so that it is visible.
32667 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32668 n, if any could be found.
32669 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32673 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32674 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32681 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32685 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32686 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32687 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32688 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32691 \begin_inset space ~
32699 arg "dialog-show character"
32702 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32703 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32708 \begin_inset Newline newline
32712 \begin_inset Flex URL
32715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32717 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32723 \begin_inset Newline newline
32727 \begin_inset space ~
32730 files for each language.
32731 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32732 \begin_inset space ~
32735 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32744 \begin_inset Newline newline
32747 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32748 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32749 but in most cases these are
32765 is the language code.
32768 \begin_layout Subsection
32772 \begin_layout Standard
32775 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32776 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32778 \begin_inset space ~
32781 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32784 you can set the following things:
32787 \begin_layout Description
32789 \begin_inset space ~
32792 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32793 Depending on your platform,
32807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32808 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32809 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32824 \begin_layout Description
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32829 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32830 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32833 \begin_layout Description
32835 \begin_inset space ~
32838 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32844 \begin_inset space \space{}
32848 This should normally not be needed.
32851 \begin_layout Description
32853 \begin_inset space ~
32857 \begin_inset space ~
32860 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32872 \begin_layout Description
32874 \begin_inset space ~
32877 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32878 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32879 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32880 appear in a context menu.
32881 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32885 \begin_layout Description
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32895 \begin_inset space ~
32898 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32902 \begin_layout Section
32904 \begin_inset Index idx
32907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32916 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32923 \begin_layout Standard
32924 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32925 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32937 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32946 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32947 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32948 which are available for many languages.
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32956 \begin_layout Subsection
32957 Setting up the thesaurus
32960 \begin_layout Standard
32969 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32973 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32978 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32984 \begin_inset space ~
32992 For instance, the US English files are named:
32995 \begin_layout Itemize
32999 \begin_layout Itemize
33003 \begin_layout Standard
33012 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33013 and you just need to point LyX (in
33015 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33016 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33017 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33024 ) to the path where they are installed.
33028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33029 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33030 ies, typical locations are
33036 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33040 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33044 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33047 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33053 LibreOffice-<Version>
33060 On the Mac, the default location is
33062 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33063 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33064 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33065 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33066 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33067 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33075 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33076 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33077 correct place right away.
33080 \begin_layout Standard
33081 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33082 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33086 \begin_layout Itemize
33087 \begin_inset Flex URL
33090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33092 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33100 \begin_layout Standard
33101 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33102 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33104 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33105 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33106 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33108 \begin_inset space ~
33114 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33115 and point LyX there.
33118 \begin_layout Standard
33119 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33121 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33124 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33130 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33133 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33141 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33142 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33143 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33145 \begin_inset space ~
33150 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33153 \begin_layout Subsection
33154 Using the thesaurus
33157 \begin_layout Standard
33158 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33160 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33163 or the toolbar button
33166 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33169 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33171 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33173 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33174 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33175 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33184 ), related terms (such as
33187 \begin_inset space ~
33196 ), compounds (such as
33199 \begin_inset space ~
33208 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33217 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33220 \begin_layout Standard
33221 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33222 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33226 \begin_layout Standard
33227 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33228 the dictionary, such as the above
33232 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33237 \begin_inset space \space{}
33240 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33241 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33242 For example, looking up the word form
33246 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33251 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33256 \begin_inset space \space{}
33267 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33268 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33269 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33272 \begin_layout Section
33274 \begin_inset Index idx
33277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33284 \begin_inset Index idx
33287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33288 Document ! Change Tracking
33294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33296 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33304 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33305 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33306 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33307 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33309 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33311 \begin_inset space ~
33314 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33316 \begin_inset space ~
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33325 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33339 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33340 You can change the color in
33342 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33343 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33354 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33360 \begin_inset Index idx
33363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33364 Color ! Change tracking
33369 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33370 the cursor is in changed text.
33371 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33374 arg "changes-merge"
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33381 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33382 \begin_inset Index idx
33385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33394 \begin_layout Standard
33395 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33401 \begin_layout Standard
33402 \begin_inset Graphics
33403 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33412 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33419 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33429 \begin_layout Standard
33430 \begin_inset Tabular
33431 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33432 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33433 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33434 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33444 arg "changes-track"
33452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33458 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33460 \begin_inset space ~
33463 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33483 arg "changes-output"
33491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33497 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33502 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33504 \begin_inset space ~
33508 \begin_inset space ~
33512 \begin_inset space ~
33521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 Jumps to the next change
33548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33557 arg "change-accept"
33565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33571 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33573 \begin_inset space ~
33576 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33578 \begin_inset space ~
33587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33596 arg "change-reject"
33604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33610 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33612 \begin_inset space ~
33615 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33617 \begin_inset space ~
33626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33635 arg "changes-merge"
33643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33651 \begin_inset space ~
33654 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33656 \begin_inset space ~
33665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33674 arg "all-changes-accept"
33682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33688 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33690 \begin_inset space ~
33693 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33695 \begin_inset space ~
33699 \begin_inset space ~
33708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33717 arg "all-changes-reject"
33725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33736 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33742 \begin_inset space ~
33751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33774 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33775 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33820 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33822 \begin_inset space ~
33838 \begin_layout Standard
33839 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33845 \begin_layout Standard
33846 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33866 \begin_layout Standard
33867 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33868 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33869 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33870 the next change after the current cursor position.
33871 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33872 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33873 step to the next change.
33874 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33877 \begin_layout Standard
33878 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33879 to describe a change.
33882 \begin_layout Standard
33883 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33888 \begin_inset Index idx
33891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33892 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33898 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33905 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33908 \begin_layout Section
33909 Comparison of Documents
33910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33912 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33917 \begin_inset Index idx
33920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 Comparison of documents
33929 \begin_layout Standard
33930 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33932 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33936 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33938 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33939 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33943 \begin_inset space ~
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33960 \begin_inset space ~
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33968 \begin_inset space ~
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33976 \begin_inset space ~
33980 \begin_inset space ~
33985 enables the change tracking option
33988 \begin_inset space ~
33992 \begin_inset space ~
33996 \begin_inset space ~
34001 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34004 \begin_layout Section
34005 International Support
34006 \begin_inset Index idx
34009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34010 International support
34018 \begin_layout Standard
34019 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34020 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34021 up LyX to use them:
34022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34024 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34031 \begin_layout Standard
34032 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34033 \begin_inset space ~
34037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34039 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34046 \begin_layout Subsection
34048 \begin_inset Index idx
34051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34058 \begin_inset Index idx
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34062 Document ! Settings
34068 \begin_inset Index idx
34071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34072 Document ! Language
34080 \begin_layout Standard
34083 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34084 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34087 dialog lets you set
34089 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34099 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34108 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34109 For details about the different encoding options see section
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34116 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34123 \begin_layout Subsection
34124 Keyboard mapping configuration
34125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34127 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 If you have for example a U.
34136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34139 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34140 can use an alternate keymap.
34141 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34142 use an Italian keymap.
34145 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34146 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34147 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34150 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34151 \begin_inset space ~
34155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34157 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34162 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34163 which one you want to use.
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34168 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34169 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34173 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34174 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34175 one to support the characters you want.
34176 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34183 \begin_layout Chapter
34186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34188 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34195 \begin_layout Standard
34196 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34197 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34198 topic inside the user's guide.
34201 \begin_layout Section
34203 \begin_inset Index idx
34206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34215 \begin_layout Standard
34220 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34223 \begin_layout Subsection
34227 \begin_layout Standard
34228 Creates a new document.
34231 \begin_layout Subsection
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34236 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34237 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34238 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34241 \begin_layout Subsection
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34249 \begin_layout Subsection
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34254 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34255 Click there on a file to open it.
34258 \begin_layout Subsection
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34263 Closes the current document.
34266 \begin_layout Subsection
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 Closes all opened documents.
34274 \begin_layout Subsection
34278 \begin_layout Standard
34279 Saves the actual document.
34282 \begin_layout Subsection
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34290 \begin_layout Subsection
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34295 Saves all opened documents.
34298 \begin_layout Subsection
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34306 \begin_layout Subsection
34310 \begin_layout Standard
34311 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34312 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34313 It is described in the section
34315 Version Control in LyX
34319 Additional Features
34324 \begin_layout Subsection
34328 \begin_layout Standard
34329 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34330 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34332 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 When using the menu entry
34339 \begin_inset space ~
34344 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_inset space ~
34356 \begin_inset space ~
34361 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34362 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34365 \begin_layout Subsection
34367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34377 You can export your document to various file formats.
34378 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34379 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34380 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34383 \begin_layout Standard
34384 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34386 \begin_inset space ~
34390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34392 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34399 \begin_layout Description
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34419 yX format of the special LyX
34420 \begin_inset space ~
34423 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34424 \begin_inset Newline newline
34427 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34430 \begin_layout Description
34431 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34437 \begin_layout Description
34439 \begin_inset space ~
34442 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34448 \begin_layout Description
34449 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34450 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34451 files paths or file names in your document.
34452 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34459 \begin_layout Description
34460 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34461 in files paths or file names
34464 \begin_layout Description
34466 \begin_inset space ~
34473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 eX) DVI-format using the program
34484 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34487 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34495 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34503 \begin_layout Description
34505 \begin_inset space ~
34508 (cropped) the same as
34512 but with cropped page margins.
34515 \begin_layout Description
34517 \begin_inset space ~
34520 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34524 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34529 \begin_layout Description
34530 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34534 \begin_layout Description
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34540 \begin_inset space ~
34543 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34547 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34555 \begin_layout Description
34562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34594 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34599 \begin_layout Description
34606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34619 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34620 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34624 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34627 \begin_layout Description
34634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34642 \begin_inset space ~
34647 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34648 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34656 \begin_layout Description
34663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34671 \begin_inset space ~
34682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34695 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34700 \begin_layout Description
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34725 music notation software
34730 \begin_layout Description
34737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34750 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34755 \begin_inset space \space{}
34759 \begin_inset space ~
34763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34778 represent the version number)
34781 \begin_layout Description
34788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 \begin_inset space ~
34802 \begin_inset space ~
34805 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34806 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34807 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34810 \begin_layout Description
34817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34829 \begin_layout Description
34830 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34835 \begin_layout Description
34836 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34838 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34841 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34845 \begin_layout Description
34847 \begin_inset space ~
34850 (cropped) the same as
34853 \begin_inset space ~
34858 but with cropped page margins.
34861 \begin_layout Description
34865 \begin_inset space ~
34870 PDF-format using the program
34874 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34877 \begin_layout Description
34881 \begin_inset space ~
34888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 PDF-format using the program
34901 , produces PDF-files directly
34904 \begin_layout Description
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34913 PDF-format using the program
34917 , produces PDF-files directly
34920 \begin_layout Description
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34929 PDF-format using the program
34933 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34936 \begin_layout Description
34940 \begin_inset space ~
34947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34956 PDF-format using the program
34960 , produces PDF-files directly
34963 \begin_layout Description
34967 \begin_inset space ~
34975 \begin_layout Description
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34988 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34989 and then exported as text using the program
34994 \begin_layout Description
34999 PostScript format using the program
35004 \begin_layout Description
35005 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35006 programming language
35019 it is possible to use
35026 \begin_layout Standard
35027 If one of the menu entries
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35043 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35044 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35045 \begin_inset space ~
35049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35051 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35056 \begin_inset Index idx
35059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35060 Reconfiguration of LyX
35068 \begin_layout Subsection
35072 \begin_layout Standard
35073 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35074 format or send it to a printer.
35075 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35076 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35082 For more information have a look at section
35083 \begin_inset space ~
35087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35089 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35096 \begin_layout Subsection
35100 \begin_layout Standard
35101 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35102 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35103 prefix, see section
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35110 reference "sec:Paths"
35115 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35124 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35125 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35132 reference "sub:Converters"
35139 \begin_layout Subsection
35140 New and Close Window
35143 \begin_layout Standard
35144 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35147 \begin_layout Subsection
35151 \begin_layout Standard
35152 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35155 \begin_layout Section
35157 \begin_inset Index idx
35160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35169 \begin_layout Subsection
35173 \begin_layout Standard
35174 Described in section
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35181 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35188 \begin_layout Subsection
35189 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35193 Described in section
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35200 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35207 \begin_layout Subsection
35211 \begin_layout Standard
35212 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35213 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35216 \begin_layout Subsection
35220 \begin_layout Standard
35221 Selects the whole document.
35224 \begin_layout Subsection
35225 Find & Replace (Quick)
35228 \begin_layout Standard
35229 Described in section
35230 \begin_inset space ~
35234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35236 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35243 \begin_layout Subsection
35244 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35247 \begin_layout Standard
35248 Described in section
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35255 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35262 \begin_layout Subsection
35263 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35266 \begin_layout Standard
35267 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35271 \begin_layout Subsection
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35276 Described in section
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35283 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35290 \begin_layout Subsection
35292 \begin_inset Index idx
35295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35296 Paragraph ! Settings
35304 \begin_layout Standard
35305 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35306 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35311 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35312 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35318 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35319 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35329 \begin_layout Subsection
35333 \begin_layout Standard
35334 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35335 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35336 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35340 \begin_layout Standard
35341 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35343 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35344 The properties of tables are described in section
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35351 reference "sec:Tables"
35355 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35362 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35369 \begin_layout Subsection
35370 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35373 \begin_layout Standard
35374 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35376 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35377 \begin_inset space ~
35381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35383 reference "sec:Nesting"
35388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35390 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35397 \begin_layout Subsection
35400 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35403 \begin_layout Standard
35404 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35405 nts of the same type.
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35413 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35417 for an explanation.
35420 \begin_layout Section
35422 \begin_inset Index idx
35425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35434 \begin_layout Standard
35435 At the bottom of the
35439 menu the opened documents are listed.
35442 \begin_layout Subsection
35443 Open/Close all Insets
35446 \begin_layout Standard
35447 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35450 \begin_layout Subsection
35451 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35454 \begin_layout Standard
35455 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35458 \begin_layout Standard
35459 Math macros are described in the
35466 \begin_layout Subsection
35470 \begin_layout Standard
35471 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35478 reference "sec:Navigating"
35483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35485 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35492 \begin_layout Subsection
35496 \begin_layout Standard
35497 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35505 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35512 \begin_layout Subsection
35516 \begin_layout Standard
35517 Opens a window showing console messages.
35518 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35522 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35523 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35526 \begin_layout Subsection
35528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35530 name "sub:Toolbars"
35535 \begin_inset Index idx
35538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35548 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35549 All toolbars and the
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35557 can be turned on and off.
35562 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35574 \begin_inset space ~
35586 \begin_inset space ~
35591 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35595 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35602 \begin_layout Standard
35607 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35611 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35612 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35613 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35614 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35615 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35618 \begin_layout Standard
35619 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35620 \begin_inset space ~
35624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35626 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35633 \begin_layout Subsection
35637 \begin_layout Standard
35641 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_inset space ~
35649 \begin_inset space ~
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35666 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35694 will split it horizontally.
35695 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35696 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35697 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35698 three or more documents at the same time.
35699 To close a split view, use the menu
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_layout Subsection
35718 \begin_layout Standard
35719 Closes a split view.
35722 \begin_layout Subsection
35726 \begin_layout Standard
35727 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35728 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35729 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35730 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35731 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35734 \begin_layout Section
35736 \begin_inset Index idx
35739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 \begin_layout Subsection
35752 \begin_layout Standard
35753 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35754 \begin_inset space ~
35758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35760 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35771 \begin_layout Subsection
35773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35775 name "sub:Special-Character"
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Here you can insert the following characters:
35786 \begin_layout Description
35791 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35793 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35794 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35795 You can get a complete display by checking
35798 \begin_inset space ~
35804 \begin_inset Newline newline
35808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35816 Not all characters will be visible in the
35820 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35828 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35832 ) can display every character.
35840 \begin_layout Description
35841 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35845 \begin_layout Description
35847 \begin_inset space ~
35851 \begin_inset space ~
35854 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35855 \begin_inset space ~
35859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35861 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35868 \begin_layout Description
35870 \begin_inset space ~
35873 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35876 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35877 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35883 \begin_layout Description
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35888 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35891 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35892 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35898 \begin_layout Description
35900 \begin_inset space ~
35903 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35907 \begin_layout Description
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35912 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35916 \begin_layout Description
35918 \begin_inset space ~
35921 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35927 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35933 \begin_layout Description
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35938 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35942 \begin_layout Description
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35948 \begin_inset Index idx
35951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35958 \begin_inset Index idx
35961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35962 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35967 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35968 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35970 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35975 \begin_inset Index idx
35978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35979 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35985 \begin_inset Newline newline
35988 More information about this feature can be found in the
35994 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36000 \begin_layout Subsection
36004 \begin_layout Standard
36005 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36008 \begin_layout Description
36009 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36010 \begin_inset script superscript
36012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36021 \begin_layout Description
36022 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36023 \begin_inset script subscript
36025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 \begin_layout Description
36036 \begin_inset space ~
36039 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36046 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36053 \begin_layout Description
36055 \begin_inset space ~
36058 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36059 \begin_inset space ~
36063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36065 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36072 \begin_layout Description
36074 \begin_inset space ~
36077 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36084 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36091 \begin_layout Description
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36096 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36102 \begin_inset space \space{}
36105 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36106 An example from the LyX
36111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36114 To insert a fraction use the command
36119 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36123 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36132 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36139 \begin_layout Description
36141 \begin_inset space ~
36144 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36151 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36158 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36163 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36170 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36177 \begin_layout Description
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36182 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36189 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36196 \begin_layout Description
36197 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36204 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36211 \begin_layout Description
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36216 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36223 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36230 \begin_layout Description
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36235 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36242 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36249 \begin_layout Description
36251 \begin_inset space ~
36255 \begin_inset space ~
36258 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36259 \begin_inset space ~
36263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36265 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36272 \begin_layout Description
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36277 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36278 as described in section
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36285 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36292 \begin_layout Description
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36297 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36298 \begin_inset space ~
36302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36304 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36311 \begin_layout Description
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36316 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36317 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36325 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36332 \begin_layout Description
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36337 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36338 \begin_inset space ~
36342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36344 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36351 \begin_layout Description
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36357 \begin_inset space ~
36360 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36361 \begin_inset space ~
36365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36367 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36374 \begin_layout Subsection
36378 \begin_layout Standard
36379 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36404 are described in section
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36411 reference "sec:toc"
36420 is described in section
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36427 reference "sec:Index"
36435 is described in section
36436 \begin_inset space ~
36440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36442 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36448 BibTeX Bibliography
36450 is described in section
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36457 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36464 \begin_layout Subsection
36468 \begin_layout Standard
36469 To insert floats, as described in section
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36476 reference "sec:Floats"
36480 and in detail the chapter
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_layout Subsection
36499 \begin_layout Standard
36500 To insert notes, described in section
36501 \begin_inset space ~
36505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36507 reference "sec:Notes"
36514 \begin_layout Subsection
36518 \begin_layout Standard
36519 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36521 Branches are described in section
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36528 reference "sec:Branches"
36535 \begin_layout Subsection
36539 \begin_layout Standard
36540 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36541 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36543 An example is the document class
36544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36551 with three custom insets.
36554 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36558 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36564 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36567 \begin_layout Subsection
36569 \begin_inset Index idx
36572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36581 \begin_layout Standard
36582 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36584 For more information see chapter
36586 External Document Parts
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36595 \begin_layout Subsection
36597 \begin_inset Index idx
36600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36610 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36611 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36626 \begin_layout Subsection
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36635 dialog as described in section
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36642 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36649 \begin_layout Subsection
36653 \begin_layout Standard
36658 as described in section
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36665 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36672 \begin_layout Subsection
36676 \begin_layout Standard
36681 as described in section
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36688 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36695 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_inset Index idx
36700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36707 \begin_inset Index idx
36710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36711 Longtables ! Caption
36719 \begin_layout Standard
36720 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36721 Floats are described in section
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36728 reference "sec:Floats"
36732 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36747 \begin_layout Subsection
36751 \begin_layout Standard
36752 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36753 \begin_inset space ~
36757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36759 reference "sec:Index"
36766 \begin_layout Subsection
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36771 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36778 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36785 \begin_layout Subsection
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36791 Tables are described in section
36792 \begin_inset space ~
36796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36798 reference "sec:Tables"
36802 and in detail in the chapter
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36817 \begin_layout Subsection
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36827 Graphics are described in section
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "sec:Graphics"
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Inserts a URL as described in section
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36853 reference "sub:URLs"
36860 \begin_layout Subsection
36864 \begin_layout Standard
36865 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36866 \begin_inset space ~
36870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36872 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36879 \begin_layout Subsection
36883 \begin_layout Standard
36884 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36891 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36898 \begin_layout Subsection
36902 \begin_layout Standard
36903 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36910 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36917 \begin_layout Subsection
36921 \begin_layout Standard
36922 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36923 title or caption of a float.
36924 Inserts a short title as described in section
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36931 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36938 \begin_layout Subsection
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36944 \begin_inset space ~
36948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36950 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36957 \begin_layout Subsection
36959 \begin_inset Index idx
36962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36971 \begin_layout Standard
36972 Inserts a program listings box.
36973 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36975 Program Code Listings
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36988 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 Inserts the actual date.
36994 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36996 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37012 \begin_layout Subsection
37016 \begin_layout Standard
37017 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37024 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37031 \begin_layout Section
37033 \begin_inset Index idx
37036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37045 \begin_layout Standard
37046 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37047 \begin_inset space ~
37050 of the current document.
37051 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37054 \begin_layout Subsection
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37060 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37061 to jump, for example, between section
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37066 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37070 2.5 and use the submenu
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37077 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37100 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37104 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37110 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37113 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37116 \begin_layout Standard
37117 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37126 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37134 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37137 \begin_layout Subsection
37138 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37141 \begin_layout Standard
37142 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37146 \begin_layout Subsection
37150 \begin_layout Standard
37151 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37152 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37153 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37157 \begin_inset space ~
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37169 \begin_layout Subsection
37173 \begin_layout Standard
37174 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37177 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37179 \begin_inset space ~
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37192 manual for a detailed description.
37195 \begin_layout Section
37197 \begin_inset Index idx
37200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37209 \begin_layout Subsection
37213 \begin_layout Standard
37214 Change Tracking is described in section
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37221 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37228 \begin_layout Subsection
37233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37243 \begin_layout Standard
37244 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37246 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37247 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37248 to the clipboard or update the view.
37249 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37252 \begin_layout Subsection
37253 Start Appendix Here
37256 \begin_layout Standard
37257 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37258 as described in section
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37265 reference "sec:Appendices"
37272 \begin_layout Subsection
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37280 \begin_layout Standard
37281 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37282 default output format for the document (menu
37284 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37285 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37286 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37304 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37308 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37310 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37311 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37316 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37321 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37339 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37343 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37344 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37346 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37347 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37352 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37357 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37367 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37372 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37373 The default output format is
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_layout Subsection
37385 View (Other Formats)
37388 \begin_layout Standard
37389 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37390 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37391 actual document with an external program.
37392 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37393 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37394 All possible formats are listed in section
37395 \begin_inset space ~
37399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37401 reference "sub:Export"
37406 You should at least see the menu entry
37411 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37412 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37419 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37424 \begin_inset Index idx
37427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37428 Reconfiguration of LyX
37436 \begin_layout Standard
37437 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37438 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37440 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37441 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37446 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37451 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37461 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37466 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37469 \begin_layout Subsection
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37479 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37482 \begin_layout Subsection
37483 Update (Other Formats)
37486 \begin_layout Standard
37487 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37488 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37491 \begin_layout Subsection
37492 View Master Document
37495 \begin_layout Standard
37496 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37512 \begin_inset space ~
37517 manual for more information on this topic).
37518 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37519 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37532 generates the output of the whole book, while
37536 will just output the chapter alone.
37539 \begin_layout Standard
37540 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37541 in the document settings (menu
37543 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37544 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37545 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37563 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37567 ) or in the preferences (menu
37569 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37570 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37575 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37580 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37598 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37605 \begin_layout Subsection
37606 Update Master Document
37609 \begin_layout Standard
37610 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37631 manual for more information on this topic).
37632 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37633 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37636 \begin_layout Standard
37637 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37638 in the document settings (menu
37640 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37641 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37642 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37654 \begin_inset space ~
37658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37660 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37664 ) or in the preferences (menu
37666 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37667 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37672 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37677 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37695 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37702 \begin_layout Subsection
37706 \begin_layout Standard
37707 Un/compresses the current document.
37710 \begin_layout Subsection
37714 \begin_layout Standard
37715 The document settings are described in appendix
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37722 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37729 \begin_layout Section
37731 \begin_inset Index idx
37734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37743 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37748 Spell checking is explained in section
37749 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37755 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37762 \begin_layout Subsection
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 The thesaurus is described in section
37768 \begin_inset space ~
37772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37774 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37781 \begin_layout Subsection
37783 \begin_inset Index idx
37786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37793 \begin_inset Index idx
37796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37805 \begin_layout Standard
37806 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37807 the highlighted document part.
37810 \begin_layout Subsection
37815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37823 \begin_inset Index idx
37826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37835 \begin_layout Standard
37836 Generates with the help of the program
37840 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37841 This feature is not available on Windows.
37844 \begin_layout Subsection
37849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37857 \begin_inset Index idx
37860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37870 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37880 to see the full filename paths.
37883 \begin_layout Subsection
37885 \begin_inset Index idx
37888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 \begin_layout Standard
37898 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37899 \begin_inset space ~
37903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37905 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37912 \begin_layout Subsection
37914 \begin_inset Index idx
37917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37918 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37929 Reconfiguration of LyX
37933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37946 \begin_inset Index idx
37949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37950 Reconfiguration of LyX
37958 \begin_layout Standard
37959 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37960 needs; see also section
37961 \begin_inset space ~
37965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37967 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37974 \begin_layout Subsection
37978 \begin_layout Standard
37983 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37984 \begin_inset space ~
37988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37990 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37997 \begin_layout Section
37999 \begin_inset Index idx
38002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38014 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38018 \begin_layout Standard
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38027 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38028 found by LyX (see also section
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38035 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38042 \begin_layout Standard
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38062 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38066 \begin_layout Section
38068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38070 name "sec:Toolbars"
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38085 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38093 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38094 This is described in the
38096 Additional Features
38101 \begin_layout Subsection
38103 \begin_inset Index idx
38106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38116 \begin_inset Graphics
38117 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38125 \begin_layout Standard
38126 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38132 \begin_layout Standard
38133 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38150 \begin_inset Note Note
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38159 manual for more information.
38167 \begin_layout Standard
38168 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 \begin_inset Tabular
38176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38177 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38185 \begin_inset Graphics
38186 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38200 pull-down box for the environments
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38222 \begin_inset Tabular
38223 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38224 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38225 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38226 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38310 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38326 arg "dialog-show print"
38334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38340 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38356 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38370 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38400 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38460 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38576 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38590 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38618 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38632 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38633 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 Emphasize text, function of the
38663 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38668 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38698 Set text to noun style, function of the
38700 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38702 \begin_inset space ~
38705 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38723 arg "textstyle-apply"
38731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 Format text using the current settings in the
38737 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38742 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38774 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38775 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38795 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38809 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38823 arg "tabular-insert"
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 Toggle outline window on/off,
38867 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38895 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38922 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38935 \begin_layout Subsection
38937 \begin_inset Index idx
38940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 \begin_layout Standard
38950 \begin_inset Graphics
38951 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38959 \begin_layout Standard
38960 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38966 \begin_layout Standard
38967 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38971 \begin_layout Standard
38972 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38978 \begin_layout Standard
38979 \begin_inset Tabular
38980 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38981 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38982 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38983 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 arg "layout Enumerate"
39028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39047 arg "layout Itemize"
39055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39065 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39101 arg "layout Description"
39109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 arg "depth-increment"
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39148 \begin_inset space ~
39157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 arg "depth-decrement"
39174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39180 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39204 arg "float-insert figure"
39212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39218 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39219 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39235 arg "float-insert table"
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39249 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39250 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39280 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39310 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39326 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39340 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39390 arg "nomencl-insert"
39398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39404 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39406 \begin_inset space ~
39415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39424 arg "footnote-insert"
39432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39438 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39468 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39502 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39503 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39548 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39578 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39657 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39658 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39674 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39689 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 arg "dialog-show character"
39717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39723 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39728 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 arg "layout-paragraph"
39752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39758 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39760 \begin_inset space ~
39769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39778 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39792 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39806 \begin_layout Subsection
39807 View/Update Toolbar
39808 \begin_inset Index idx
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 Toolbar ! View / Update
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39821 \begin_inset Graphics
39822 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39830 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39837 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39841 \begin_layout Standard
39842 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39848 \begin_layout Standard
39849 \begin_inset Tabular
39850 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39851 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39852 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39853 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39877 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39893 arg "buffer-update"
39901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39907 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39923 arg "master-buffer-view"
39931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39937 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 arg "master-buffer-update"
39965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39971 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39995 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40010 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40011 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40012 Synchronize with Output
40018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 \begin_inset Graphics
40024 filename ../images/view-others.png
40026 groupId toolbarbuttons
40037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40043 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40044 View (Other Formats)
40050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40055 \begin_inset Graphics
40056 filename ../images/update-others.png
40058 groupId toolbarbuttons
40067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40074 Update (Other Formats)
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40088 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40092 \begin_layout Subsection
40096 \begin_layout Standard
40097 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40104 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40108 , the table toolbar
40109 \begin_inset Index idx
40112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40126 manual and the math macro toolbar
40127 \begin_inset Index idx
40130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40143 \begin_layout Chapter
40144 The Document Settings
40145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40147 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40152 \begin_inset Index idx
40155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40156 Document ! Settings
40164 \begin_layout Standard
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40173 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40174 is called with the menu
40176 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40180 You can save your document settings as default with the
40182 Save as Document Defaults
40184 button in any dialog.
40185 This will create a template named
40189 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40193 \begin_layout Standard
40198 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40199 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40202 \begin_layout Standard
40203 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40204 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40205 to find the one you are looking for.
40206 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40207 the submenus of the dialog.
40209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40213 \begin_inset space \space{}
40217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40224 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40225 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40226 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40229 \begin_layout Section
40233 \begin_layout Standard
40234 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40236 Document classes are described in section
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40243 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40251 \begin_layout Standard
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40260 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40264 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40265 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40267 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40276 \begin_layout Standard
40277 Some classes use special class options by default.
40278 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40282 and you can decide to use them or not.
40283 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40284 recommended you leave them untouched.
40289 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40294 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40295 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40301 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40302 \begin_inset Newline newline
40307 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40310 \begin_inset Newline newline
40313 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40319 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40321 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40333 \begin_layout Standard
40338 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40339 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40340 document is opened without its master.
40341 This way child documents are always compilable.
40342 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_layout Standard
40358 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40368 \begin_inset Index idx
40371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40372 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40378 \begin_inset Index idx
40381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40382 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40387 for cross-references, see section
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40394 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40401 \begin_layout Section
40405 \begin_layout Standard
40406 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40407 Please refer to the section
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40423 manual for details.
40426 \begin_layout Section
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 Modules are explained in section
40432 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40438 reference "sub:Modules"
40445 \begin_layout Section
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40457 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40464 \begin_layout Section
40468 \begin_layout Standard
40469 The document font settings are described in section
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40476 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40483 \begin_layout Section
40487 \begin_layout Standard
40488 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40505 and whether it should be a
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40513 can also be specified here.
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40517 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40519 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40521 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40527 Use justification in LyX work area
40529 you can decide if LyX justifies the text on screen.
40530 This only affects the text inside LyX not in the output.
40533 \begin_layout Section
40537 \begin_layout Standard
40538 This dialog is described in sections
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40545 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40552 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40559 \begin_layout Section
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40564 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40571 reference "sub:Margins"
40578 \begin_layout Section
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40582 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40587 \begin_inset Index idx
40590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 Language ! Encoding
40599 \begin_layout Standard
40600 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40601 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40602 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40603 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40604 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40605 known for a particular character).
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40609 If you use the option
40613 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40614 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40615 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40616 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40617 exactly one encoding.
40618 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40621 \begin_layout Standard
40622 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40623 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40624 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40625 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40626 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40627 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40632 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40633 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40634 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40635 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40636 engines to standard LaTeX.
40637 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40638 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40691 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40696 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40700 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40703 \begin_layout Standard
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40712 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40722 The possible settings are:
40725 \begin_layout Description
40726 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40728 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40729 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40739 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40746 \begin_layout Description
40747 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40748 format you will use.
40749 In many cases this will be
40754 \begin_inset Index idx
40757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40758 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40764 If the newer package
40769 \begin_inset Index idx
40772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40773 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40778 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40779 this package will be used instead of
40786 \begin_layout Description
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40799 would be more appropriate.
40802 \begin_layout Description
40803 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40804 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40808 (for German texts), type in
40811 \begin_inset Newline newline
40816 usepackage{ngerman}
40819 \begin_layout Description
40820 None will not use a language package.
40821 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40824 \begin_layout Standard
40825 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40828 \begin_layout Description
40830 \begin_inset space ~
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40845 , but the LaTeX-package
40850 \begin_inset Index idx
40853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40854 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40860 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40861 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40862 languages in TeX code.
40865 \begin_layout Description
40866 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40867 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40868 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40871 \begin_layout Description
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40880 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40883 \begin_layout Description
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40892 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40895 \begin_layout Description
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40900 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40903 \begin_layout Description
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40912 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40913 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40916 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40925 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40929 \begin_layout Description
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40938 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40939 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40942 \begin_layout Description
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40955 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_layout Description
40964 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40975 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40976 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40979 \begin_layout Description
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40989 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40990 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset space ~
41001 \begin_layout Description
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41010 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41011 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41012 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41013 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_layout Description
41026 \begin_inset space ~
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41033 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41036 \begin_layout Description
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41045 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41048 \begin_layout Description
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41057 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41060 \begin_layout Description
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41065 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41068 \begin_layout Description
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41073 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41076 \begin_layout Description
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41085 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41088 \begin_layout Description
41090 \begin_inset space ~
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41100 \begin_layout Description
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_inset space ~
41109 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41112 \begin_layout Description
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_layout Description
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41130 \begin_inset space ~
41133 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41138 \begin_inset Index idx
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41142 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41147 , when using this, set the document language to
41152 \begin_layout Description
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41161 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41165 , when using this, set the document language to
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41174 \begin_layout Description
41176 \begin_inset space ~
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41183 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41188 \begin_inset Index idx
41191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41192 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41197 , when using this, set the document language to
41202 \begin_layout Description
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41211 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41215 , when using this, set the document language to
41220 \begin_layout Description
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41229 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41233 , when using this, set the document language to
41238 \begin_layout Description
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41243 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41246 \begin_layout Description
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41259 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41262 \begin_layout Description
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41275 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41276 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41277 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41280 \begin_layout Description
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_layout Description
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41301 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41302 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41305 \begin_layout Description
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41311 \begin_inset space ~
41314 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41319 \begin_inset Index idx
41322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41323 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41328 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41331 \begin_layout Description
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41348 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41353 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41355 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41358 \begin_layout Description
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41367 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41372 \begin_inset Index idx
41375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41376 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41381 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41389 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41394 \begin_inset Index idx
41397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41398 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41404 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41408 \begin_layout Description
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_inset space ~
41418 \begin_inset space ~
41421 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41428 \begin_layout Description
41430 \begin_inset space ~
41434 \begin_inset space ~
41438 \begin_inset space ~
41441 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41442 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41443 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41447 \begin_layout Description
41449 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_inset space ~
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41460 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41461 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41464 \begin_layout Section
41466 \begin_inset Index idx
41469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 \begin_inset Index idx
41479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41486 \begin_inset Index idx
41489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41490 Color ! Shaded boxes
41496 \begin_inset Index idx
41499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41508 \begin_layout Standard
41509 Here you can alter the font color for the
41513 (default: black), for
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41521 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41525 (default: white) and for
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41538 sets the color back to the default.
41541 \begin_layout Standard
41542 Clicking any button showing
41550 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41551 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41552 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41553 later more quickly.
41556 \begin_layout Standard
41557 Note, if you change the
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41565 font color and use the option
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41573 in the document settings under
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41581 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41588 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41595 \begin_layout Standard
41596 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41602 \begin_layout Standard
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41615 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41620 Code after a forced page break:
41623 \begin_layout Itemize
41624 For the page color:
41625 \begin_inset Newline newline
41632 pagecolor{color name}
41635 \begin_layout Itemize
41636 For the text color:
41637 \begin_inset Newline newline
41647 \begin_layout Standard
41648 You are restricted to one of
41684 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41697 \begin_inset Newline newline
41700 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41701 names to refer to them:
41704 \begin_layout Itemize
41710 \begin_inset Newline newline
41715 page_backgroundcolor
41718 \begin_layout Itemize
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41728 \begin_inset Newline newline
41736 \begin_layout Itemize
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_inset Newline newline
41754 \begin_layout Itemize
41758 \begin_inset space ~
41764 \begin_inset Newline newline
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41773 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41784 \begin_inset space ~
41792 \begin_layout Section
41796 \begin_layout Standard
41797 Here you can adjust the
41801 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41805 as described in section
41806 \begin_inset space ~
41810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41812 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41819 \begin_layout Section
41823 \begin_layout Standard
41824 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41829 \begin_inset Index idx
41832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41833 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41843 \begin_inset Index idx
41846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41847 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41855 Sectioned bibliography
41857 using the LaTeX package
41862 \begin_inset Index idx
41865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41871 and you can select a
41875 for the generation of the bibliography.
41876 For a further description see section
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41883 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41890 \begin_layout Section
41894 \begin_layout Standard
41895 Here you can define the
41899 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41907 reference "sec:Index"
41914 \begin_layout Section
41918 \begin_layout Standard
41919 The PDF properties are explained in section
41920 \begin_inset space ~
41924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41926 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41933 \begin_layout Section
41937 \begin_layout Standard
41938 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41943 \begin_inset Index idx
41946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41947 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41957 \begin_inset Index idx
41960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 LaTeX-packages ! amssymb
41971 \begin_inset Index idx
41974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41975 LaTeX-packages ! cancel
41985 \begin_inset Index idx
41988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41989 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41999 \begin_inset Index idx
42002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42003 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42013 \begin_inset Index idx
42016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42017 LaTeX-packages ! mathtools
42027 \begin_inset Index idx
42030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42031 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42041 \begin_inset Index idx
42044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42045 LaTeX-packages ! stackrel
42055 \begin_inset Index idx
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 LaTeX-packages ! stmaryrd
42069 \begin_inset Index idx
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42073 LaTeX-packages ! undertilde
42078 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42081 \begin_layout Description
42082 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42083 ensure that you have this enabled.
42086 \begin_layout Description
42087 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42088 letters, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, ensure that you have
42092 \begin_layout Description
42093 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42108 \begin_layout Description
42109 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42124 \begin_layout Description
42125 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42136 \begin_layout Description
42137 mathtools is used for the math commands
42173 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42180 \begin_layout Description
42181 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42183 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42192 \begin_layout Description
42193 stackrel is used for the math command
42210 \begin_layout Description
42211 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42214 \begin_layout Description
42215 undertilde is used for the math command
42223 Accents for one Character
42232 \begin_layout Section
42236 \begin_layout Standard
42237 The float placement options are described in the section
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42248 \begin_inset space ~
42256 \begin_layout Section
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42261 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42263 Program Code Listings
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42276 \begin_layout Section
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42281 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42289 set to be used and set the
42294 The itemize environment is described in section
42295 \begin_inset space ~
42299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42301 reference "sec:Itemize"
42308 \begin_layout Standard
42309 You can furthermore specify a
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42317 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42318 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42325 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42331 \begin_inset space \space{}
42335 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42345 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42346 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42349 \begin_layout Standard
42350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42358 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42361 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42362 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42370 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42374 usepackage{textcomp}
42377 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42381 usepackage{amssymb}
42391 \begin_layout Section
42395 \begin_layout Standard
42396 Branches are described in section
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42403 reference "sec:Branches"
42410 \begin_layout Section
42412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42414 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42422 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42425 \begin_layout Description
42427 \begin_inset space ~
42431 \begin_inset space ~
42434 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42454 View Master Document
42455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42462 Update Master Document
42463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42470 menu or the toolbar.
42471 The default is set in
42473 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42474 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42479 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42483 \begin_inset space ~
42487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42489 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42496 \begin_layout Description
42498 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_inset space ~
42505 Output settings for the menu
42507 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42515 For a detailed description see section
42517 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_layout Description
42532 \begin_inset space ~
42536 \begin_inset space ~
42539 Options offers settings for the export format
42545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42563 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42564 \begin_inset space ~
42567 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42571 \begin_inset space ~
42576 settings are described in detail in section
42578 Math Output in XHTML
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42601 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42604 \begin_layout Section
42609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42620 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42621 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42622 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42623 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42627 \begin_layout Standard
42628 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42635 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42642 \begin_layout Chapter
42648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42650 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42655 \begin_inset Index idx
42658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42670 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42674 It has the following submenus.
42677 \begin_layout Section
42681 \begin_layout Subsection
42685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42686 User Interface File
42687 \begin_inset Index idx
42690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42691 Customization ! of toolbars
42697 \begin_inset Index idx
42700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42701 Customization ! of menus
42709 \begin_layout Standard
42710 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42711 interface (ui) file.
42712 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42720 \begin_layout Description
42725 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42728 \begin_layout Description
42735 the menu entries in popup context menus
42738 \begin_layout Description
42743 specifies the toolbar buttons
42746 \begin_layout Standard
42747 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42748 and edit the entries.
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42752 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42764 entries must be finished with an explicit
42789 and in the case of the
42790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42802 The syntax for the entries is:
42805 \begin_layout Standard
42806 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42836 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42839 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42841 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_layout Standard
42863 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42869 \begin_layout Standard
42870 For example, assuming you use the menu
42872 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42875 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42880 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42906 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42921 to have the sixth bookmark.
42924 \begin_layout Standard
42928 \begin_inset space ~
42933 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42934 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42938 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42952 Enable tool tips in main work area
42954 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42962 \begin_layout Standard
42967 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42970 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42980 \begin_layout Subsection
42984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42988 \begin_layout Standard
42991 Restore window layouts and geometries
42993 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42994 in the last LyX session.
42997 \begin_layout Standard
43000 Restore cursor positions
43002 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43006 \begin_layout Standard
43009 Load opened files from last session
43011 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43017 Clear all session information
43019 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
43020 of last opened documents, etc.).
43023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43027 name "sub:Backup documents"
43032 \begin_inset Index idx
43035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43044 \begin_layout Standard
43047 Backup original documents when saving
43049 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43050 it was saved the last time.
43051 It is stored in the
43054 \begin_inset space ~
43060 \begin_inset space ~
43064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43066 reference "sec:Paths"
43070 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43073 \begin_inset space ~
43079 The backup file has the file extension
43080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43094 \begin_layout Standard
43097 Backup documents, every
43099 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43102 \begin_layout Standard
43105 Save documents compressed by default
43107 always saves files in a compressed format.
43110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43111 Windows & work area
43114 \begin_layout Standard
43117 Open documents in tabs
43119 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43127 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
43131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43139 reference "sec:Paths"
43143 for information about LyXServer pipes.
43149 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
43151 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
43154 \begin_layout Standard
43157 Single close-tab button
43159 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43162 \begin_inset Graphics
43163 filename ../images/closetab.png
43170 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43171 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43175 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43183 For this option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43196 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43198 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43200 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43204 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43205 instances of LyX and only want to close the view in once instance.
43208 \begin_layout Subsection
43210 \begin_inset Index idx
43213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43222 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43229 \begin_layout Standard
43230 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43242 This section only deals with the fonts
43247 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43250 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43251 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43263 By default, LyX uses
43279 (depends on the system) as its
43282 \begin_inset space ~
43298 \begin_layout Standard
43299 You can change the font size with the
43306 \begin_layout Standard
43311 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43316 points have the size of 1
43317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43327 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43332 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43337 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43338 \begin_inset space ~
43342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43344 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43351 \begin_layout Standard
43354 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43356 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43357 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43358 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43359 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43361 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43362 \begin_inset space ~
43368 \begin_layout Subsection
43370 \begin_inset Index idx
43373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43380 \begin_inset Index idx
43383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43393 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43394 the list and selecting the
43401 \begin_layout Standard
43402 By checking the option
43406 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43409 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43419 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43422 \begin_layout Subsection
43424 \begin_inset Index idx
43427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43436 \begin_layout Standard
43437 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43440 \begin_layout Standard
43445 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43446 This feature is described in section
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43453 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43460 \begin_layout Standard
43461 Checking the option
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43477 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43480 \begin_layout Section
43482 \begin_inset Index idx
43485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43494 \begin_layout Subsection
43498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43502 \begin_layout Standard
43505 Cursor follows scrollbar
43507 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43511 \begin_layout Standard
43512 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43513 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43514 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43517 \begin_layout Standard
43520 Scroll below end of document
43522 is self-explanatory.
43525 \begin_layout Standard
43526 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43533 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43535 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43536 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43539 \begin_layout Standard
43542 Sort environments alphabetically
43544 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43547 \begin_layout Standard
43550 Group environments by their category
43552 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43555 \begin_layout Standard
43560 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43576 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43581 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43582 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43586 \begin_layout Subsection
43588 \begin_inset Index idx
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43598 \begin_inset Index idx
43601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 Settings ! Shortcuts
43610 \begin_layout Standard
43615 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43616 Several binding files are available, among them:
43619 \begin_layout Description
43620 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43623 \begin_layout Description
43624 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43636 \begin_layout Description
43637 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43648 \begin_layout Standard
43649 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43654 , and binding files for special languages.
43655 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43660 \begin_inset space \space{}
43664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43672 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43677 Some binding files, like
43681 , only have a limited scope.
43682 When looking at the end of the file
43686 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43689 \begin_layout Standard
43693 \begin_inset space ~
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43702 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43703 in the selected key binding file.
43706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43710 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43715 \begin_inset Index idx
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43719 Key Bindings ! Editing
43727 \begin_layout Standard
43728 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43729 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43730 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43733 Show key-bindings containing
43736 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43737 Insert there for example as keyword
43738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43745 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43746 functions that contain
43747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43755 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43756 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43760 that you will find in the
43767 \begin_layout Standard
43768 For example, to add the shortcut
43776 , select the function and press the
43781 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43782 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43785 \begin_layout Standard
43786 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43787 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43788 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43789 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43790 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43795 \begin_layout Standard
43796 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43799 \begin_layout Standard
43800 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43802 The syntax of the entries is:
43805 \begin_layout Standard
43811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43829 \begin_layout Subsection
43831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43833 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43838 \begin_inset Index idx
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 \begin_inset Index idx
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43852 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43861 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43862 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43863 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43864 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43876 and select the keyboard map file named
43883 \begin_layout Standard
43892 keyboard map and, if you use the
43896 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43899 arg "keymap-primary"
43905 arg "keymap-secondary"
43908 respectively or toggle between them with
43911 arg "keymap-toggle"
43917 \begin_layout Standard
43918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43926 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43935 \begin_layout Standard
43936 You can also specify the mouse
43938 Wheel scrolling speed
43941 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43945 \begin_layout Standard
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43962 you can select a key for zooming.
43963 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43966 \begin_layout Subsection
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43971 Input completion is described in section
43972 \begin_inset space ~
43976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43978 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43985 \begin_layout Section
43987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43994 \begin_inset Index idx
43997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44004 \begin_inset Index idx
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44016 \begin_layout Standard
44017 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
44019 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44022 \begin_layout Description
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44027 directory This is LyX's working directory.
44028 It is the default when you
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44047 \begin_layout Description
44049 \begin_inset space ~
44052 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44054 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44056 \begin_inset space ~
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44068 \begin_layout Description
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44073 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44079 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44083 \begin_inset Newline newline
44087 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44099 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44107 \begin_layout Description
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44113 \begin_inset Index idx
44116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44122 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44123 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44124 \begin_inset space ~
44128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44130 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44138 will be used to save the backups.
44139 \begin_inset Newline newline
44142 Backup files have the ending
44143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44153 \begin_layout Description
44158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 \begin_inset space ~
44169 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44170 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
44171 \begin_inset Newline newline
44178 You add a BibTeX-database
44183 You can edit this file with the program
44192 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44201 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44206 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44207 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44213 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44214 \begin_inset Newline newline
44217 The pipe is also used for the
44222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44228 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44233 \begin_inset Newline newline
44236 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44237 \begin_inset Newline newline
44253 \begin_layout Description
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44258 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44261 \begin_layout Description
44263 \begin_inset space ~
44266 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44267 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44268 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44271 \begin_layout Description
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44276 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44282 You only need to specify it if you are using
44286 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44292 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44296 \begin_layout Description
44298 \begin_inset space ~
44301 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44302 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44303 where to find it on the system.
44304 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44305 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44314 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44315 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44318 \begin_layout Description
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44323 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44324 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44326 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44328 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44329 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44330 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44331 scanned for the input files.
44332 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44333 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44334 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44335 compilation may fail for some documents.
44338 \begin_layout Section
44342 \begin_layout Standard
44343 Here you can insert your
44352 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44360 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44364 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44367 \begin_layout Section
44369 \begin_inset Index idx
44372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44373 Language ! Settings
44379 \begin_inset Index idx
44382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 Settings ! Language
44391 \begin_layout Subsection
44393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44395 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44402 \begin_layout Description
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44411 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44412 You can find its actual translation status here:
44413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44415 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44422 \begin_layout Description
44424 \begin_inset space ~
44427 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44429 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44430 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44447 The most widespread language package is
44452 \begin_inset Index idx
44455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44461 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44462 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44463 alternative language package
44468 \begin_inset Index idx
44471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44477 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44478 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44484 The available selections are described in section
44485 \begin_inset space ~
44489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44491 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44498 \begin_layout Description
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44503 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44504 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44505 An example is the start command
44511 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44516 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44531 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44536 \begin_layout Description
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44546 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44547 command toggles the package on and off.
44550 \begin_layout Description
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44559 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44563 \begin_layout Description
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44569 \begin_inset space ~
44572 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in LyX's dialogs.
44575 \begin_layout Description
44577 \begin_inset space ~
44581 \begin_inset space ~
44584 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44585 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44586 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44587 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44594 \begin_layout Description
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44599 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44601 When this option is not set, the
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44609 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44610 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44613 \begin_inset space ~
44621 \begin_layout Description
44623 \begin_inset space ~
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44635 When it is not set, the
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44643 is set to the end of the document.
44646 \begin_layout Description
44648 \begin_inset space ~
44652 \begin_inset space ~
44655 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44656 language will be underlined in blue.
44659 \begin_layout Description
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44665 \begin_inset space ~
44668 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44669 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44672 \begin_layout Description
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44677 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44678 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44679 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44680 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44683 \begin_layout Subsection
44687 \begin_layout Standard
44688 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44695 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44702 \begin_layout Section
44706 \begin_layout Subsection
44710 \begin_layout Description
44712 \begin_inset space ~
44716 \begin_inset space ~
44719 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44722 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44723 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44731 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44734 \begin_layout Description
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset Index idx
44743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44750 \begin_inset Index idx
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44754 Settings ! Date format
44759 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44760 \begin_inset Newline newline
44764 \begin_inset Flex URL
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44769 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44775 \begin_inset Newline newline
44778 For example the format
44779 \begin_inset Newline newline
44783 \begin_inset Newline newline
44786 prints the date as day/month/year.
44789 \begin_layout Description
44791 \begin_inset space ~
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44798 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44801 \begin_layout Description
44803 \begin_inset space ~
44806 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44808 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44810 \begin_inset space ~
44816 For a detailed description see section
44818 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44823 \begin_inset space ~
44831 \begin_layout Subsection
44833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44840 \begin_inset Index idx
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 \begin_inset Index idx
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44862 \begin_layout Description
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44867 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44872 The name will be used when the
44877 \begin_inset Newline newline
44881 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44889 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44897 \begin_layout Description
44899 \begin_inset space ~
44902 command is the command LyX
44903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44910 LaTeX uses for printing.
44918 \begin_layout Description
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44927 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44928 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44929 of the program that provides the
44936 \begin_layout Description
44938 \begin_inset space ~
44942 \begin_inset space ~
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44949 printer This option works only for the
44954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44966 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44967 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44970 \begin_layout Subsection
44975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44985 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44990 \begin_inset Index idx
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45002 \begin_layout Description
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45026 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45031 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45052 are used for Cyrillic.
45053 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45066 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45067 LyX sets up in the background.
45068 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45071 \begin_layout Description
45073 \begin_inset space ~
45077 \begin_inset space ~
45080 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45085 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
45088 \begin_layout Description
45090 \begin_inset space ~
45094 \begin_inset space ~
45098 \begin_inset space ~
45102 \begin_inset space ~
45105 options They only have an effect when the program
45109 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45112 \begin_layout Standard
45113 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45114 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45115 manuals of the applications.
45118 \begin_layout Description
45120 \begin_inset space ~
45123 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45124 \begin_inset space ~
45128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45130 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
45137 \begin_layout Description
45139 \begin_inset space ~
45142 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45149 reference "sub:Index-Program"
45156 \begin_layout Description
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45161 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45168 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
45175 \begin_layout Description
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45191 command Command for the program
45195 that is described in the section
45201 Additional Features
45206 \begin_layout Standard
45207 There are additionally the following options:
45210 \begin_layout Description
45212 \begin_inset space ~
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45231 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45249 to separate folders.
45250 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45251 \begin_inset Index idx
45254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45261 \begin_inset Index idx
45264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45273 \begin_layout Description
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45298 changes Removes all manually set
45304 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45305 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45312 dialog when changing the document class.
45315 \begin_layout Section
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45321 \begin_inset Index idx
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45333 \begin_layout Subsection
45335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45337 name "sub:Converters"
45342 \begin_inset Index idx
45345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45354 \begin_layout Standard
45355 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45356 from one format to another.
45357 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45358 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45370 field and press the
45375 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45384 drop-down list, modify the
45388 field and press the
45395 \begin_layout Standard
45398 Converter File Cache
45404 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45406 Maximum Age (in days
45409 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45410 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45413 \begin_layout Standard
45414 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45415 definition, is described in the section
45426 \begin_layout Subsection
45428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45430 name "sec:File-Formats"
45435 \begin_inset Index idx
45438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45445 \begin_inset Index idx
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 \begin_layout Standard
45458 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45467 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45470 \begin_layout Standard
45471 You can also define the
45473 Default output format
45475 that is used when you use
45477 View, Update, View Master Document
45481 Update Master Document
45487 menu or the toolbar.
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45491 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45502 \begin_layout Standard
45503 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45504 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45505 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45506 This is done by specifying a
45511 More about this is described in the section
45522 \begin_layout Chapter
45523 Units available in LyX
45524 \begin_inset Index idx
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45536 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45543 \begin_layout Standard
45545 \begin_inset space ~
45549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45551 reference "tab:Units"
45555 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45558 \begin_layout Standard
45559 \begin_inset Float table
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45584 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45592 \begin_inset Tabular
45593 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45594 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45747 scaled point (65536
45748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45808 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45863 % of original image width
45870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46077 \begin_layout Chapter
46079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46081 name "chap:Credits"
46088 \begin_layout Standard
46089 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46090 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46093 \begin_layout Itemize
46096 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46099 \begin_layout Itemize
46105 \begin_layout Itemize
46111 \begin_layout Itemize
46117 \begin_layout Itemize
46123 \begin_layout Itemize
46129 \begin_layout Itemize
46135 \begin_layout Itemize
46141 \begin_layout Itemize
46144 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46147 \begin_layout Itemize
46153 \begin_layout Itemize
46159 \begin_layout Itemize
46165 \begin_layout Itemize
46171 \begin_layout Itemize
46177 \begin_layout Itemize
46183 \begin_layout Itemize
46189 \begin_layout Itemize
46195 \begin_layout Itemize
46197 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46206 \begin_layout Standard
46207 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46210 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46217 \begin_layout Bibliography
46218 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46219 LatexCommand bibitem
46226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46229 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46234 \begin_inset Newline newline
46238 \begin_inset Flex URL
46241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46243 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46251 \begin_layout Bibliography
46252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46253 LatexCommand bibitem
46254 key "latexcompanion"
46258 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46260 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46263 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46266 \begin_layout Bibliography
46267 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46268 LatexCommand bibitem
46273 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46276 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46279 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46282 \begin_layout Bibliography
46283 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46284 LatexCommand bibitem
46291 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46294 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46297 \begin_layout Bibliography
46298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46299 LatexCommand bibitem
46311 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46314 \begin_layout Bibliography
46315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46316 LatexCommand bibitem
46322 \begin_inset Newline newline
46326 \begin_inset Flex URL
46329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46331 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46339 \begin_layout Bibliography
46340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46341 LatexCommand bibitem
46347 \begin_inset Newline newline
46351 \begin_inset Flex URL
46354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46356 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46364 \begin_layout Bibliography
46365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46366 LatexCommand bibitem
46372 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46374 name "Documentation"
46375 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46384 \begin_inset Newline newline
46388 \begin_inset Flex URL
46391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46393 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46401 \begin_layout Bibliography
46402 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46403 LatexCommand bibitem
46409 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46411 name "Documentation"
46412 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46416 how to use the program
46421 \begin_inset Newline newline
46425 \begin_inset Flex URL
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46430 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46438 \begin_layout Bibliography
46439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46440 LatexCommand bibitem
46446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46448 name "Documentation"
46449 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46458 \begin_inset Newline newline
46462 \begin_inset Flex URL
46465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46467 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46475 \begin_layout Bibliography
46476 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46477 LatexCommand bibitem
46483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46485 name "Documentation"
46486 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46495 \begin_inset Newline newline
46499 \begin_inset Flex URL
46502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46512 \begin_layout Bibliography
46513 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46514 LatexCommand bibitem
46520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46522 name "Documentation"
46523 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46527 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46528 \begin_inset Newline newline
46532 \begin_inset Flex URL
46535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46545 \begin_layout Bibliography
46546 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46547 LatexCommand bibitem
46553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46555 name "Documentation"
46556 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46560 of the LaTeX-package
46565 \begin_inset Index idx
46568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46569 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46575 \begin_inset Newline newline
46579 \begin_inset Flex URL
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46592 \begin_layout Bibliography
46593 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46594 LatexCommand bibitem
46600 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46602 name "Documentation"
46603 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46607 of the LaTeX-package
46612 \begin_inset Index idx
46615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46616 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46622 \begin_inset Newline newline
46626 \begin_inset Flex URL
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46631 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46639 \begin_layout Bibliography
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46641 LatexCommand bibitem
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46649 name "Documentation"
46650 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46654 of the LaTeX-package
46659 \begin_inset Index idx
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46669 \begin_inset Newline newline
46673 \begin_inset Flex URL
46676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46678 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46686 \begin_layout Bibliography
46687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46688 LatexCommand bibitem
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46696 name "Documentation"
46697 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46701 of the LaTeX-package
46706 \begin_inset Index idx
46709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46710 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46716 \begin_inset Newline newline
46720 \begin_inset Flex URL
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46725 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46733 \begin_layout Bibliography
46734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46735 LatexCommand bibitem
46741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46743 name "Documentation"
46744 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46748 of the LaTeX-package
46753 \begin_inset Index idx
46756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46757 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46763 \begin_inset Newline newline
46767 \begin_inset Flex URL
46770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46772 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46780 \begin_layout Bibliography
46781 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46782 LatexCommand bibitem
46788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46790 name "Documentation"
46791 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46795 of the LaTeX-package
46800 \begin_inset Index idx
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46804 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46810 \begin_inset Newline newline
46814 \begin_inset Flex URL
46817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46819 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46827 \begin_layout Bibliography
46828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46829 LatexCommand bibitem
46835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46837 name "Documentation"
46838 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46842 of the LaTeX-package
46847 \begin_inset Index idx
46850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46851 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46857 \begin_inset Newline newline
46861 \begin_inset Flex URL
46864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46866 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46874 \begin_layout Bibliography
46875 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46876 LatexCommand bibitem
46882 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46885 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46889 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46890 \begin_inset Newline newline
46894 \begin_inset Flex URL
46897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46899 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46907 \begin_layout Bibliography
46908 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46909 LatexCommand bibitem
46915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46918 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46922 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46923 \begin_inset Newline newline
46927 \begin_inset Flex URL
46930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46932 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46940 \begin_layout Bibliography
46941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46942 LatexCommand bibitem
46948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46951 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46955 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46956 \begin_inset Newline newline
46960 \begin_inset Flex URL
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46965 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46973 \begin_layout Bibliography
46974 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46975 LatexCommand bibitem
46981 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46984 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46988 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46989 \begin_inset Newline newline
46993 \begin_inset Flex URL
46996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46998 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47006 \begin_layout Bibliography
47007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47008 LatexCommand bibitem
47014 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47017 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47021 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
47022 \begin_inset Newline newline
47026 \begin_inset Flex URL
47029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47031 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47039 \begin_layout Bibliography
47040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47041 LatexCommand bibitem
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47050 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47054 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
47055 \begin_inset Newline newline
47059 \begin_inset Flex URL
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47064 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47072 \begin_layout Bibliography
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47074 LatexCommand bibitem
47080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47083 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47087 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
47088 \begin_inset Newline newline
47092 \begin_inset Flex URL
47095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47097 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47105 \begin_layout Bibliography
47106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47107 LatexCommand bibitem
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47116 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47120 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
47121 \begin_inset Newline newline
47125 \begin_inset Flex URL
47128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47130 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47138 \begin_layout Bibliography
47139 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47140 LatexCommand bibitem
47146 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47149 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47153 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
47154 \begin_inset Newline newline
47158 \begin_inset Flex URL
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47163 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47171 \begin_layout Bibliography
47172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47173 LatexCommand bibitem
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47182 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47186 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
47187 \begin_inset Newline newline
47191 \begin_inset Flex URL
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47196 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47204 \begin_layout Bibliography
47205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47206 LatexCommand bibitem
47212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47215 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47219 about new features in
47224 \begin_inset Newline newline
47228 \begin_inset Flex URL
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47233 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47241 \begin_layout Standard
47242 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47276 \begin_inset Note Note
47279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47286 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47287 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47288 bibliography is the second one:
47296 \begin_layout Standard
47297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47298 LatexCommand bibtex
47299 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47300 options "biblio/alphadin"
47307 \begin_layout Standard
47308 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47311 \begin_layout Standard
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47313 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47319 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47320 LatexCommand printindex